66254 En

B-66254EN/05

FANUC PICTURE & F PAssist

For WindowsOPERATOR’S MANUAL

• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. • All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country from where the product is exported. In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as ”impossible”. This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not followed by or in the main body.

B-66254EN/05 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

s-1

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING Applied when there is a danger of the user being

injured or when there is a damage of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not observed.

NOTE The Note is used to indicate supplementary

information other than Warning and Caution. - Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

B-66254EN/05 TABLE OF CONTENTS

c-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE .................................s-1 1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................................1 2 SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................................3

2.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ...................................................................... 4 2.2 SCREENS CREATABLE WITH THE TOOL .................................................. 5 2.3 RESTRICTIONS............................................................................................ 7 2.4 SETTING ON THE CNC SIDE....................................................................... 8 2.5 CREATING A SCREEN IN A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN JAPANESE ........ 9 2.6 I/O DEDICATED TO THE OPERATOR'S PANEL ......................................... 9 2.7 INDICATOR DISPLAY WHEN THE CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTION

(TWO-SCREEN DISPLAY) IS USED .......................................................... 10 2.8 BUTTON AND LAMP SIGNAL DISPLAY FUNCTION ................................. 11 2.9 MANUAL OPERATION SCREEN AND 5- BUTTON MENU........................ 12

3 INSTALLING THE TOOL ......................................................................13 3.1 INSTALLING MICROSOFT VISUAL BASIC................................................ 14 3.2 INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE & FPASSIST ............................................ 15

3.2.1 INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE&FPAssist / (A08B-9010-J513 #ZZ11)..........15 3.2.2 Initializing the Add-in Tools for Excel2000 ..........................................................17

3.3 UNINSTALLING FANUC PICTURE & FPASSIST ....................................... 19

4 USING FANUC PICTURE .....................................................................20 4.1 ACTIVATING FANUC PICTURE ................................................................. 21 4.2 PROCEDURE FOR SCREEN CREATION.................................................. 25

4.2.1 Procedure for Creating Standard Screens for Toyota Motor..................................25 4.2.2 Procedure for Creating Screens That Support Multi-Language Display

Switching................................................................................................................26 4.3 SETTING A MENU FUNCTION................................................................... 27

4.3.1 CREATING A NEW PROJECT ............................................................................27 4.3.2 OPENING A PROJECT.........................................................................................30 4.3.3 Setting a Project......................................................................................................30 4.3.4 EDITING A PROJECT ..........................................................................................35 4.3.5 ACTIVATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist) .........35 4.3.6 Multi-Language Batch Input ..................................................................................36 4.3.7 Creating Memory Card Format Data......................................................................36

TABLE OF CONTENTS B-66254EN/05

c-2

4.3.8 COPYING OPERATOR'S PANEL SCREEN DATA AND THE FP DRIVER TO A MEMORY CARD........................................................................................39

4.3.9 COMPOSITE SCREEN DISPLAY .......................................................................40 4.3.9.1 Operation for Composite Screen Display .......................................................... 41 4.3.9.2 Method of Composite Screen Output ................................................................ 43

4.3.10 Assistant V-UP.......................................................................................................44

5 DOWNLOADING SCREEN DATA TO THE CNC .................................46 6 OPERATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL

(FPASSIST)...........................................................................................48 6.1 OVERVIEW OF FPASSIST ......................................................................... 49 6.2 REGISTERING/CHANGING/DELETING OPERATOR'S PANEL

SCREENS ................................................................................................... 50 6.2.1 Create .....................................................................................................................50 6.2.2 Move ......................................................................................................................51 6.2.3 Del ......................................................................................................................51 6.2.4 Copy ......................................................................................................................52 6.2.5 Rename...................................................................................................................52

6.3 CHECKING SCREEN DATA ....................................................................... 53 6.4 CONVERTING DATA .................................................................................. 53 6.5 VERSION DISPLAY .................................................................................... 54 6.6 UPGRADING TO THE LATEST VERSION ................................................. 54 6.7 MINIMIZATION............................................................................................ 54

7 SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPASSIST)................................................................................55 7.1 SCREEN CREATION PROCEDURE USING FPASSIST............................ 56 7.2 SCREEN REGISTRATION AND SETTING OF THE ENTIRE SYSTEM ..... 57

7.2.1 Edition Display Screen...........................................................................................57 7.2.2 Operation Time Setting Screen ..............................................................................58 7.2.3 Screen Switch Menu...............................................................................................59 7.2.4 Registering Screens ................................................................................................60 7.2.5 Screen Registration - Setting Table (1/4) ...............................................................61

7.2.5.1 Default name button .......................................................................................... 63

7.2.6 Automatic Screen Switching, Initial Screen Setting, etc. - Setting Table (2/4) .....64 7.2.7 Shift Time Setting - Setting Table (3/4) .................................................................68 7.2.8 Output of Internal Operator's Panel Data - Setting Table (4/4)..............................69

7.3 FAULT DISPLAY SCREEN ......................................................................... 71


c-3

7.3.1 Components............................................................................................................72 7.3.1.1 LMP01 to LMP63: Lamps................................................................................. 72 7.3.1.2 BTN01 to BTN07: Manual buttons ................................................................... 72

7.3.2 Lamp Setting - Setting Table (1/2).........................................................................75 7.3.3 Button Area Setting - Setting Table (2/2)...............................................................76

7.4 MANUAL OPERATION SCREEN (COMMON SPECIFICATIONS FOR PAGE 1 AND PAGE 2) ....................................................................... 77 7.4.1 Screen Configuration..............................................................................................77

7.4.1.1 Numeric display subscreen ................................................................................ 78 7.4.1.2 Signal monitor subscreen................................................................................... 78

7.4.2 Lamp and Manual Button Setting - Setting Tables (1/3, 2/3) ................................79 7.4.3 Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (3/3) ..............................................80

7.5 NC OPERATION SCREEN.......................................................................... 81 7.5.1 Screen Configuration..............................................................................................81

7.5.1.1 Alarm display subscreen.................................................................................... 82 7.5.1.2 Axis coordinate display subscreen..................................................................... 82 7.5.1.3 Program check subscreen .................................................................................. 83

7.5.2 Lamp Area and Button Area Setting - Setting Tables (1/4, 2/4) ............................85 7.5.3 Path Selection Signal Setting - Setting Table (3/4) ................................................87 7.5.4 Fault Message Setting - Setting Table (4/4) ...........................................................90

7.6 TOOL EXCHANGE COUNTER 1 SCREEN ................................................ 91 7.6.1 Screen Configuration..............................................................................................91

7.6.1.1 Setting and display of pre-forecast, forecast, and stop values ........................... 92 7.6.1.2 Measurement of the current value counter ........................................................ 92 7.6.1.3 Display of tool exchange information ............................................................... 93 7.6.1.4 Resetting of a current value counter .................................................................. 93

7.6.2 Counter Setting - Setting Table (1/3) .....................................................................94 7.6.3 Ten-Key Pad Setting - Setting Table (2/3) .............................................................95 7.6.4 Operation Button Setting - Setting Table (3/3) ......................................................96

7.7 TOOL EXCHANGE COUNTER 2 SCREEN ................................................ 97 7.8 TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER SCREEN .......................................... 99

7.8.1 Screen Configuration..............................................................................................99 7.8.1.1 Setting and display of limit values................................................................... 100 7.8.1.2 Compensation operation .................................................................................. 100 7.8.1.3 Display and resetting of a current value .......................................................... 101 7.8.1.4 Compensation processing ................................................................................ 101 7.8.1.5 When two paths are used ................................................................................. 102 7.8.1.6 Interlock (available with E3.02 and later) ....................................................... 102

7.8.2 Setting of Counter Names and So Forth - Setting Table (1/3) .............................103 7.8.3 Counter Signal Setting - Setting Table (2/3) ........................................................104


c-4

7.8.4 Operation Button Setting - Setting Table (3/3) ....................................................105 7.9 RUNNING DISPLAY SCREEN.................................................................. 106

7.9.1 Screen Configuration............................................................................................106 7.9.2 Lamp Area Setting - Setting Table (1/3) ..............................................................107 7.9.3 Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (2/3) ............................................107 7.9.4 Running Display Lamp Setting - Setting Table (3/3)...........................................108

7.10 RUNNING DISPLAY 2 SCREEN............................................................... 109 7.10.1 Screen Configuration............................................................................................109 7.10.2 Lamp Area Setting - Setting Table (1/3) ..............................................................110 7.10.3 Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (2/3) ............................................110 7.10.4 Operation Indicator Lamp Setting - Setting Table (3/3).......................................111

7.11 FAULT COUNT SCREEN (USED FOR 36 AND 168 FAULT ITEMS) ....... 112 7.11.1 Screen Configuration............................................................................................112

7.11.1.1 Counting of the number of faults and measurement of stop time.................... 113 7.11.1.2 Page switch method ......................................................................................... 114 7.11.1.3 Relationship with the operational situation screen .......................................... 114

7.11.2 Fault Count Related Setting - Setting Table (1/1) ................................................115 7.12 CYCLE TIME MEASUREMENT SCREEN................................................. 116

7.12.1 Screen Configuration............................................................................................116 7.12.1.1 Edge type operation ......................................................................................... 117 7.12.1.2 Level type operation ........................................................................................ 117

7.12.2 Cycle Time Item Name and Measurement Signal Setting - Setting Table (1/1) ..118 7.13 CYCLE TIME SETTING SCREEN............................................................. 119 7.14 OPERATIONAL SITUATION SCREEN ..................................................... 120

7.14.1 Screen Configuration............................................................................................120 7.14.2 Operational Situation Item Setting .......................................................................122

7.15 MANUAL OPERATION 2 SCREEN........................................................... 123 7.15.1 Screen Specification .............................................................................................123 7.15.2 Lamp and Button Area Setting - Setting Table (1/4, 2/4, 3/4) .............................124 7.15.3 Numeric Display Area and Motion Sequence Setting - Setting Table (4/4) ........125

7.16 OPERATION STATUS MONITOR SCREEN............................................. 126 7.17 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDANCE SCREEN........................................... 128

7.17.1 Method of Alarm Code Transfer ..........................................................................130 7.17.2 Detailed Guidance Screen ....................................................................................131

7.18 FLOW DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN ................................................................. 133 7.18.1 Screen Configuration............................................................................................133

7.18.1.1 Screen function ................................................................................................ 133 7.18.1.2 Method of alarm code transfer......................................................................... 136


c-5

7.18.1.3 Method of flow diagnostic message creation................................................... 136 7.18.1.4 Detailed description screen.............................................................................. 137 7.18.1.5 Flow diagnosis continuation function after the power Is turned on again....... 137 7.18.1.6 Flow read function........................................................................................... 138

7.18.2 Fault Title and Presumed Cause Setting - Setting Table (1/4) .............................140 7.18.3 Flow Diagnostic Message Setting - Setting Table (2/4).......................................142 7.18.4 Image File Name and Detail Message Setting - Setting Table (3/4) ....................143 7.18.5 Button Area Setting - Setting Table (4/4).............................................................144

7.19 LOAD TORQUE MONITOR SCREEN....................................................... 145 7.19.1 Load Torque Monitor Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1) .................................145

7.20 QUALITY CHECK SCREEN...................................................................... 147 7.20.1 Screen Configuration............................................................................................147 7.20.2 Quality Check PMC Ladder and Timing Chart....................................................149 7.20.3 Quality Check Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1) .............................................150

7.21 CYCLE MONITOR SCREEN..................................................................... 152 7.21.1 Cycle Monitor Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1).............................................152

7.22 SAFETY IO STATUS DISPLAY SCREEN................................................. 153 7.22.1 Screen Configuration............................................................................................153 7.22.2 Built-in Safety Logic Status Screen .....................................................................156 7.22.3 TR SAFETY I/O STATUS DISPLAY.................................................................158 7.22.4 Safety IO Status Display Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/2).............................159 7.22.5 Safety IO Status Display Screen Setting – Setting Table (2/2) ............................161

7.23 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCREEN ...................................................... 163 7.23.1 Screen Configuration............................................................................................163 7.23.2 Periodic Maintenance Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1) .................................165

7.24 αi MOTOR TEMPERATURE MONITOR SCREEN ................................... 166 7.24.1 Screen Configuration............................................................................................166 7.24.2 αi Motor Temperature Monitor Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1) ..................168

8 MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL........................................169 8.1 ENVIRONMENT, CONDITIONS, AND SETTING OF

THE MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL ....................................... 170 8.2 OPERATIONS OF THE MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL......... 171

8.2.1 Project Screen List Sheet......................................................................................172 8.2.2 Adding a Multi-Language Caption Setting Sheet ................................................174 8.2.3 Explanation of Displayed Multi-Language Caption Setting Sheet Functions......175 8.2.4 Multi-Language Display of a Project with Single-Language User Forms ...........176

8.3 ENTERING A MULTI-LANGUAGE CAPTION SETTING SHEET.............. 178


c-6

8.3.1 FPAssist Multi-Language Setting Sheet...............................................................178 8.3.2 User Screen Multi-Language Setting Sheet .........................................................180

8.4 CHECKING DATA SETTINGS .................................................................. 181 8.4.1 NEED ...................................................................................................................181 8.4.2 ERROR.................................................................................................................181 8.4.3 WARNING...........................................................................................................181 8.4.4 OK 181

8.5 DATA REFLECTION IN FPASSIST........................................................... 182 8.6 CONTROL TO BE READ IN USER FORM ............................................... 183 8.7 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE SCREEN SHEET LIST AND FORM

DATA ......................................................................................................... 184 8.7.1 Reread of an FPAssist Form.................................................................................185 8.7.2 Reread of a User Form .........................................................................................187

8.8 UPGRADING THE MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL................. 188

APPENDIX

A DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS .........................................................191 A.1 ONE-BYTE CHARACTERS....................................................................... 192 A.2 TWO-BYTE CHARACTERS ...................................................................... 193

A.2.1 JIS Level 1............................................................................................................193 A.2.2 JIS Level 2............................................................................................................198 A.2.3 FANUC Special Characters..................................................................................199

B LADDER DIAGRAM FOR COMPENSATION PROCESSING ON THE TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER SCREEN ...................200

C FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT PROCEDURE ....................204 C.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 205 C.2 DATA CREATION AND INPUT PROCEDURE.......................................... 206

C.2.1 Creating Display Information for Each Alarm/Information Required for Diagnosis Flows..............................................................................................206

C.2.2 Input of Data into Excel Sheets ............................................................................208 C.2.2.1 Input of data into the fault diagnostic screen sheet.......................................... 208 C.2.2.2 Entering data in the flow diagnosis sheet ........................................................ 209 C.2.2.3 Enter data in the detailed description sheet...................................................... 211

C.3 CREATING FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES FOR MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY .......................................................... 212 C.3.1 Add Button for Multi-Language Setting Sheets...................................................212 C.3.2 Deleting Multi-Language Setting Sheets..............................................................213


c-7

C.3.3 Input of Data into Multi-Language Setting Sheets...............................................213

D METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA .........214 D.1 FUNCTION OVERVIEW............................................................................ 215 D.2 DATA STRUCTURE .................................................................................. 216 D.3 METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA

WITH THE FL-NET FUNCTION ................................................................ 218

E OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP.................................................223 E.1 PLC → OPERATOR'S PANEL (N0080 TO N0254) ................................... 225 E.2 OPERATOR'S PANEL → PLC (M0112 TO M0254) .................................. 231

B-66254EN/05 1.OVERVIEW

- 1 -

1 OVERVIEW The operator's touch panel screen development tool (FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist/A08B-9010-J513#ZZ11) for the Series 18i-LNA / Series 18i-LNB / Power Mate i-LNA consists of the two software products list below. (See the next page.) • FANUC PICTURE • FPAssist FANUC PICTURE is a tool for creating a machine operation screen on the personal computer. FANUC PICTURE is used to set a screen layout and graphical properties such as the locations, shapes and sizes of components. For the standard screens for Toyota Motor, screen data (screen template) created by FANUC PICTURE beforehand is available, and is installed together with this tool. FPAssist is a tool for setting properties such as the names, colors, and PMC addresses of components (such as buttons and lamps) on a screen created with FANUC PICTURE. FPAssist is based on MS Excel. FPAssist allows a desired screen to be created by entering property values in tables prepared on Excel sheets and combining the values with a screen template. The standard screens for Toyota Motor can be created simply by setting data with FPAssist. With FPAssist E3.00 and later, screens can be created in English and Polish as well as in Japanese. In addition to allowing screens to be created in Japanese, English, and Polish, which are the languages conventionally used for the multi-language display function, Edition 7.00 and later of the operator’s touch panel screen development tool FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist (A08B-9010-J513#ZZ11) support creation of screens in Simplified Chinese. The multi-language display function is available when the Series 18i-LNB is used. The actual languages that can be installed concurrently on a CNC are Japanese, English, and a third language. The third language may be selected from Polish and Simplified Chinese. Note on use of FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist Edition 6.00 and later 1. The multi-language display function is not supported for a

troubleshooting guidance screen. To create an operator’s panel screen for multi-language display, install a flow diagnostic screen.

1.OVERVIEW B-66254EN/05

- 2 -

Notes on use of FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist Edition 7.00 and later 1. Upgrading of FPAssist for Excel 95 has been discontinued. The

functions related to Excel 95 and the relevant information in the operator’s manual will therefore be phased out.

2. Screens in Simplified Chinese can be created by using FPAssist for Excel 2000 and the multi-language batch input tool (running on Excel 2000) for multi-language text input.

3. Edition 7.00 and later do not support Visual Basic-based creation of user screens for Simplified Chinese display, nor do they support composite screen display in Simplified Chinese.

Requirements of creation of screens in Simplified Chinese 1. Excel 2000 and Service Release Pack 3 or later 2. Arial Unicode MS font (included in Office 2000) 3. FEP software for Simplified Chinese text input (which should be

provided by the user who wants to use the FEP to input Simplified Chinese text)

Screen creation tool (FANUC PICTURE)

+

Screen creation tool (FANUC PICTURE) Locate components (such as buttons and lamps) on the screen, and set their graphical properties such as shapes, sizes, and positions.

Screen template (provided by FANUC)

Screen data

Screen creation support tool (FPAssist)

Converted to intermediate code

Memory card

CNC display unit

Enter the properties (such as colors, display character strings, and PMC addresses) of components (such as buttons and lamps) located on the screen in Excel sheets, then combine the entered properties with the screen template to create desired screen data.

B-66254EN/05 2.SPECIFICATIONS

- 3 -

2 SPECIFICATIONS

2.SPECIFICATIONS B-66254EN/05

- 4 -

2.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT To use FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist, a personal computer with the following operating environment is needed: Operating software:

Windows 2000, XP (Windows for Pentium CPUs) Application:

MS Excel 2000 (required to use FPAssist and multi-language batch input tool)

Excel 2000 Service Release Pack 3 or later (required to use the multi-language batch input tool) MS Visual Basic 5.0 or 6.0 (required to use FANUC PICTURE)

or Visual Basic 5.0 Control Creation Edition SP2 Peripheral:

Memory card drive based on the PCMCIA specifications


- 5 -

2.2 SCREENS CREATABLE WITH THE TOOL With the tool, the screens listed in the table below can be created. The table also indicates the number of screens that can be created with one system.

Series 18i-No. Screen name Number of creatable screens

LNA LNBPMi-LNA

FPAssistVersion (Note)

1 Fault display screen Multiple screens can be created. 2 Manual operation screen Multiple screens can be created.

3 Manual operation 2 screen Multiple screens can be created (with some restrictions).

4 NC operation screen Two screens can be created (with some restrictions).

5 Tool exchange counter 1 screen

6 Tool exchange counter 2 screen

One of these two screens can be created.

Note 1

7 Tool compensation counter screen

Only one screen can be created. Note 2

8 Running display screen Multiple screens can be created. 9 Running display 2 screen Multiple screens can be created.

10 Fault count screen Only one screen can be created. Note 3

11 Cycle time measurement screen

Only one screen can be created.

12 Cycle time setting screen Only one screen can be created. Note 4

13 Operational situation screen Only one screen can be created. Note 7

14 Operation status monitor screen

Multiple screens can be created.

15 Troubleshooting guidance screen

Only one screen can be created.

16 Flow diagnostic screen Only one screen can be created. Note 6

17 User-created screen(sub) Multiple screens can be created. Note 518 Version display screen One screen is always created. Note 8

19 Load torque monitor screen One screen is always created. Version

4.05

20 User-created screen(main) Multiple screens can be created. Version

5.10 Note 5

21 Quality check screen One screen is always created. Version

5.10 Note 9

22 Cycle monitor screen One screen is always created. Version

5.10 Note 10

23

Safety IO status display screen Built-in safety logic status screen TR safety I/O status screen

Each one screen is always created.

Version 5.10Version 5.50

Version 5.50

24 Periodic maintenance screen One screen is always created. Version

5.30

25 αi motor temperature monitor screen

One screen is always created. Version

5.30


- 6 -

NOTE 1 A tool exchange counter is built into the operator's touch panel. So, no counter

needs to be prepared on the PMC. These screens can be created simply by setting count trigger addresses in an Excel sheet. Registers for setting pre-forecast values, forecast values, and limit values are also built into the operator's panel.

2 The tool compensation counter screen directly displays the registers in the CNC. So, no registers need to be provided on the PMC.

3 An alarm count measurement and abnormal stop time measurement are made using the operator's touch panel. Measurement values for the past six years including the current date are stored.

4 A cycle time counter is built into the operator's touch panel. So, no cycle time counter needs to be prepared on the PMC. These screens can be created simply by setting a count start address and count end address in an Excel sheet. A reference value and measurement values for ten times are stored.

5 By selecting the screen type, user-created screen, a screen close to the standard screen can be created and registered in the screen switch menu with FANUC PICTURE.

6 When using FANUC PICTURE E2.00 and later, use the flow diagnostic screen basically. The flow diagnostic screen has a CNC fault diagnosis flow incorporated. The flow diagnostic screen displays a CNC diagnosis message when a CNC alarm is issued.

7 When the operational situation screen is used, the fault count screen, the cycle time measurement screen, and the cycle time setting screen are also required.

8 A version display screen is created automatically by the system, regardless of the setting. This screen displays the name of an operator's panel, the version of screen data, the version of FANUC PICTURE, and so forth. This screen is displayed on the operator's panel screen immediately after the power is turned on. (This function is available with E2.00 and later.)

9 The tool exchange counter screen is required. Moreover, the FANUC PMC is required.

10 When a cycle monitor screen is created, a cycle time measurement screen and cycle time setting screen cannot be created.

Only the former screen or the latter screens can be created at a time. FPAssist Version 6.04 and later support switching between these screens to enable only either of them to be used on a CNC.


- 7 -

2.3 RESTRICTIONS The types of characters that can be displayed on a screen for Japanese and singly-byte code display are limited to a range of characters that can be used with the C language executor. For details, see Appendix A, “DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS”. The following shows the character sizes usable for Japanese and single-byte code display, and those for Simplified Chinese display. Japanese and single-byte code display

Alphabetic character, symbol Type of

characterNumeric character Lower-

case Upper- case

Hiragana, kanji Katakana

Half size X Full size Double

height and width size

X X

6x size X X X

: Displayable X : Not displayable

NOTE For full-size characters, specify S-JIS as the

character code setting. Simplified Chinese display

Alphabetic character, symbol Type of

characterNumeric character Lower-

case Upper- case

Hiragana, kanji Katakana

Half size X X Full size Double

height and width size

X X

6x size X X X

NOTE For full-size characters, specify Unicode as the

character code setting. When the CNC control unit is in Simplified Chinese display mode, a machine operator’s panel may also provide Simplified Chinese display. If the CNC control unit is in Japanese display mode, for example, Simplified Chinese characters cannot be displayed properly on an operator’s panel screen. To set a different display language, the CNC control unit must be turned off and then back on.


- 8 -

Restrictions on creation of screens in Simplified Chinese [Important] To create screens in Simplified Chinese, use only the FPAssist tool and multi-language batch input tool. With a Japanese version of Visual Basic, S-JIS character codes are used for character processing. This means that when captions are input with Simplified Chinese codes (international codes), some of the Simplified Chinese codes cause their characters to be garbled. If the screen form file containing this data is saved as-is, the file is processed with the garbled characters still included, resulting in recurrence of the garbled characters on a machine operator’s panel screen. You must therefore not use Visual Basic to create machine operator’s panel screens in Simplified Chinese. • Visual Basic-based screen editing (user screen creation) is not

supported. • Composite screens display in Simplified Chinese is not supported. To collect bitmaps from a machine operator’s panel screen in Simplified Chinese, use the Ethernet-connected CNC screen display function.

2.4 SETTING ON THE CNC SIDE The following parameters must be set on the CNC to enable a screen created with the tool to be displayed on the CNC display unit:

Parameter value Parameter No. Series 18i-LNA / PMi-LNA Series 18i-LNB

8661 58 251 8662 4 4 8781 92 120

To enable Simplified Chinese display, the Simplified Chinese display option is required.


- 9 -

2.5 CREATING A SCREEN IN A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN JAPANESE

FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist E3.00 and later support screens in English and Polish. By setting the output language setting field in [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration], you can choose a language used for screen display from Japanese, English, and Polish. A screen created using FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist includes fixed characters output by FPAssist as well as characters entered by the user. By the setting described above, the language used for fixed characters output by FPAssist can be switched. FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist E6.00 and later enable concurrent installation of Japanese, English, and Polish on machine operator’s panel screens. Which language is used for screen display is determined by the display language parameter settings on the CNC control unit side. FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist E7.00 and later enable concurrent installation of up to three languages of your choice on machine operator’s panel screens: Japanese, English, and a third language (either Polish or Simplified Chinese). Which language is used for screen display is determined by the display language parameter settings on the CNC control unit side.

2.6 I/O DEDICATED TO THE OPERATOR'S PANEL An operator's touch panel created using FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist uses 48 bits from M0112.0 to M0117.7 in the M-NET interface area (M/N) between the CNC and PMC as an internal work area. So, this area is dedicated to the operator's panel, and must not be used for any other purposes.


- 10 -

2.7 INDICATOR DISPLAY WHEN THE CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTION (TWO-SCREEN DISPLAY) IS USED

While the CNC is connected with a personal computer via Ethernet, and the CNC screen is displayed on the personal computer with the dual display capability of the CNC screen display function, an indicator for indicating which of the CNC and personal computer is operating the screen is displayed in the upper-left corner of the operator's panel screen. By touching the area where the indicator appears, you can switch between the NC and personal computer to operate the screen. When the indicator shows "PC", touching this indicator area on the screen on the NC side changes the indicator to "NC", allowing operations to be performed from the touch panel on the NC. When the indicator indicates "NC", clicking this indicator area on the screen on the personal computer side changes the indicator to "PC", allowing operations to be performed from the personal computer. This function is available starting with overall edition E5.00 of FANUC PICTURE&FPAssist.

Indication Key input user PC Personal computer side NC CNC control unit side


- 11 -

2.8 BUTTON AND LAMP SIGNAL DISPLAY FUNCTION By setting the PMC parameters for M-NET interface control, signal information related to touched buttons and lamps can be displayed in a popup window. This function is available starting with overall edition E5.00 of FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Button

operation disable

Signal address display

K08

P.NACT P.SDSP

Bit Symbol Detailed description

K08.0 P.SDSP

Set this bit to 1 to display the signals set for button control and lamp control.

CAUTION: The signal set with an interlocked button cannot be displayed.

K08.1 P.NACT

Valid when K08.0 = 1. Set this bit to 1 to disable button control operation.

CAUTION: When this signal is set to 1, screen switch button operation is also disabled. This means that screen display cannot be switched from the operator's panel screen to other screens such as the CNC screen. As a countermeasure, install an external switch or create a ladder circuit that turns off K08.1 automatically with a timer when a certain time has elapsed.

When K08.0 is set to 1, a popup window as shown is displayed while an operation button is pressed.


- 12 -

2.9 MANUAL OPERATION SCREEN AND 5- BUTTON MENU Numeric display subscreen button of manual operation screen was changed from Edition7.09 of FANUC PICTURE&FPAssist to the layout as shown in the figure below. This allows the 5-button menu and the numeric display subscreen buttons to exist together, thereby enabling a maximum of 20 display subscreen buttons to be registered.

B-66254EN/05 3.INSTALLING THE TOOL

- 13 -

3 INSTALLING THE TOOL

3.INSTALLING THE TOOL B-66254EN/05

- 14 -

3.1 INSTALLING Microsoft Visual Basic First, install Microsoft Visual Basic in the personal computer. For installation, execute Setup. For details, refer to the manual of Visual Basic.

CAUTION 1 Users of Visual Basic Version 5.0 Control Creation Edition must associate installed

VB5.0 CCE with the file extension VBP (register the file type). The executable file name is VB5CCE.EXE.

2 If you attempt to open a project created with VB6.0 with VB5.0 for screen editing, the error shown below occurs. Click OK to proceed to load the project. Alternatively, before starting to edit with VB5.0, open the "project-name.VBP" file on a text editor, delete the single line that starts with the key indicated in the dialog box (in this case, "Retained="), and open the project for screen editing.


- 15 -

3.2 INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist

3.2.1 INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE&FPAssist / (A08B-9010-J513 #ZZ11)

1. When the CD-ROM of the product is inserted into the CD-ROM

drive, installation is automatically started. Perform installation according to the dialog messages displayed.

2. If installation is not automatically started by step 1 above, activate DISK1\SETUP.EXE in drive D (CD-ROM drive) directly.

This method of activation can be executed by reading drive A in the description of installation on the floppy disk product as drive D and specifying DISK1 folder.

<1> Click Run on the Start menu of Windows. <2> Enter D:\Disk1\Setup.exe in Open. <3> Click OK to start setup operation.

Proceed to perform installation according to the messages

displayed in dialog boxes. <4> Upon completion of setup operation, the desktop displays a

shortcut icon for FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist.

The dialog boxes that appear during the installation are described below. The following dialog box can be used to select a display language that is used for installation and associated with FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist. When Windows is set to use Japanese, Japanese is automatically selected. Otherwise, English is selected.


- 16 -

The following dialog box can be used to select the type of a tool for assisting machine operator's panel screen creation (FPAssist) to be installed

FPAssist edition to select

Language used in Windows

Edition of FPAssist and display language Selected when

Non-Japanese (e.g. English)

Excel2000 edition (English display) Windows is set to use non-Japanese.

Excel2000 edition (Japanese display)

Excel95 edition (Japanese display)

Japanese

Both of Excel2000 and Excel95 editions (Japanese display)

Windows is set to use Japanese. Either or both of Excel95 and Excel2000 are selected according to the version of MS Excel to use. However, when you want to use Excel2000 edition (English display), check Toyota Motor Corporation's thoughts on this matter. In FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist Edition 7.00 and later, upgrading of FPAssist for Excel 95 has been discontinued.

* To use the multi-language display function, you must select Excel2000.


- 17 -

3.2.2 Initializing the Add-in Tools for Excel2000 When FANUC PICTURE&FPAssist is re-installed, and the install folder is specified in a location different from the previous location, the storage locations of the add-in macros used by the FPAssist tool and multi-language batch input tool operating on Excel2000 must be changed. The current version of Microsoft Excel cannot, however, automatically change the location of this add-in macro. Thus, this subsection explains the procedure for changing it. Strictly speaking, there are cases in which the procedure for "initializing the add-in tool" is not necessary, but to explain this accurately would make things even more difficult. Regardless of whether initialization is necessary or not, the Excel tool can be operated normally subsequently by following the procedure described below. <1> Start Excel 2000. <2> In the menu bar, click [Tool]-[Add In] to display the Add In

dialog box.

<3> If the Add In dialog box contains "Mlt_Fpassist", go to <4>.

Otherwise, go to <5>.

<4> Check the "Mlt_Fpassist" check box. If the dialog box shown

below is displayed, click [Yes]. Otherwise, go to <5>.

Look at this


- 18 -

<5> If the Add In dialog box contains "Fpamlt", go to <6>. Otherwise,

go to <7>.

<6> Check the "Fpamlt" check box. If the dialog box shown below is

displayed, click [Yes]. Otherwise, go to <7>.

<7> Click the [Cancel] button to end the procedure.

CAUTION : Important To use the Excel tool provided by FANUC PICTURE

& FPAssist, set the security level for macro execution to Medium.

Click [Tools], point to [Macro], and then click [Security…]. In the [Security Level] tab, select

Medium.


- 19 -

3.3 UNINSTALLING FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist This section describes how to uninstall FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist. It is a good idea to perform this uninstallation procedure before reinstalling FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist. • On the [ Start] menu, click [Settings] and then click [Control

Panel]. In the Control Panel, double-click [Add/Remove Program] and then click the [Install/Uninstall] tab.

• Click [FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist]. • Click the Add/Remove… button. Follow the dialog messages to continue the uninstallation procedure.

4.USING FANUC PICTURE B-66254EN/05

- 20 -

4 USING FANUC PICTURE

B-66254EN/05 4.USING FANUC PICTURE

- 21 -

4.1 ACTIVATING FANUC PICTURE To activate FANUC PICTURE, double-click the icon for FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist. The following menu appears:

The function of each menu item is indicated below.

Menu item Function

New Project This item is used to create a new project. This item is also used to restore a project from screen data that is saved from the machine operator's panel with the batch save function. A new folder is created, and Visual Basic is activated.

Open Project This item is used to select an already created project for editing. (This item does not activate Visual Basic but is used to make a selection only.)

Setting of project This item enables or disables the multi-language display function. The item is also used to make settings such as the method of changing the displayed language. When using the batch tool, check the "The Multi-language display function is used." check button.

Edit Project This item allows you to edit a project selected with Open Project after Visual Basic is activated.

Assistant This item activates the screen creation support tool (FPAssist). Multi input This item starts the multi-language batch tool.

Make MEM

This item creates screen data to be read into the CNC. A memory card file named Cex0fpdt.mem is created. The boot function of the CNC is used for incorporation into the CNC. Usually, a file created with Make MEM includes not only screen data but also all files that are needed to create screen data and are compressed. By creating a new project based on these files, the project with which screen data was created can be restored, and screen editing and addition can be performed. Clicking this button while holding down the Ctrl key does not create data for project restoration. Use this item to save data processing time at the stage of screen data debugging.

Write to card This item is used to copy screen data created with Make MEM and the FP driver for displaying such screen data to the memory card.


- 22 -

Menu item Function

Composite Screen

This item enables you to combine component screens such as button screens and lamp screens created with FPAssist into a single screen to be displayed on the machine operator's panel. This item also enables you to check the layout on the personal computer. With the Print Screen key, you can take an entire screen from the clipboard into Paintbrush or a WORD document.

Assistant V-UP FPAssist for Excel95 V2.11 or earlier can be upgraded to the FPAssist version that is currently installed. This menu button has the same function as the V-UP button of FPAssist. Before using this button, select a project to be edited with Open Project.

List This item displays the positions of buttons and lamps and property settings on a screen-by-screen (form-by-form) basis. These data items can also be output to a file.

HELP This item displays descriptions of objects and properties.

EXIT This item exits from FANUC PICTURE.

CAUTION

1 Note that clicking Make MEM while holding down the Ctrl key does not create data for screen data restoration. Usually, do not press the Ctrl key.


- 23 -

You may have installed two FPAssist editions for Excel95 and Excel2000 on your Windows that has been set to use Japanese. Even in this case, you can call the appropriate Excel selectively with a single click of the Assistant menu button because the edition in use is automatically identified according to the open project. To enable this, register the paths of Excel95 and Excel2000 execution files, as described below. This setting for Excel2000 is also enabled with the Multi input menu button.

Right-click here on the title bar. The pull-down menu as shownbelow appears. Choose [Excel Information] to specify the directoriescontaining Excel execution programs.


- 24 -

[Excel95] and [Excel2000]:

Set the execution program names and the full paths to the folders in which execution programs have been installed. After making this setting, the Assistant button can start the appropriate Excel version by automatically identifying Excel for the FPAssist edition.

[Project Information]:

You can check the Excel version by which FPAssist for the project currently selected has been created.

[Excel95] and [Excel2000] (buttons):

You can manually switch from Excel95 to Excel2000.

CAUTION Do not switch from Excel2000 to Excel95.

Otherwise, the program does not work properly.


- 25 -

4.2 PROCEDURE FOR SCREEN CREATION

4.2.1 Procedure for Creating Standard Screens for Toyota Motor The procedure for creating an operator's panel screen with FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist is indicated below.

Download the screen data from the memory card to the CNC.

Check and print an operator's panel screen created with Composite Screen on the personal computer.

When editing operator's panel screen data existing on the personal computer

Activate FANUC PICTURE. Activate FANUC PICTURE.

Select an existing project with Open Project.

Create a new project with New Project.

Activate FPAssist and set screen data with Assistant.

With Make MEM, convert the data to data capable of being downloaded to the CNC.

Write the screen data to a memory card with Write to card.

When creating a new operator's panel screen

Activate FANUC PICTURE.

Create a new project with New Project.

When restoring a project from data saved in a batch from the CNC

Select Get from Template in the Expand file dialog box.

Select Get from MEM File in the Expand file dialog box.


- 26 -

4.2.2 Procedure for Creating Screens That Support Multi-Language Display Switching

Basically, screens are created according to the procedure described in Subsection 4.2.1. To support multi-language display, add the steps indicated by shading in the figure to the left. Check the "The Multi-language display function is used." property. Multi-language data can be created in up to four languages: English, Japanese, Polish, and Simplified Chinese. Three of these languages can be selected as display languages, including Japanese, English, and either of the remaining two languages. When you check this property, the default settings for the multi-language display function, which are described below, take effect. 1 Creation in three languages including English, Japanese, and

Polish 2 The display language on the operator's panel is determined by the

display language parameter settings of the CNC. • Japanese if bit 0 of parameter No. 3102 is set to 1 • Polish if bit 2 of parameter No. 3190 is set to 1 • Chinese if bit 6 of parameter No. 3190 is set to 1

If none of the above parameter conditions is satisfied, a screen is displayed in English, which is the initial default, or a language you set as the default. CNC flow diagnostic messages are indicated only in Japanese and English, which is set when a language other than Japanese is selected. Machine flow data can be set in up to four languages (Japanese, English, Polish, and Chinese). You should actually set machine flow data for language sheets selected with Setting of project for language output. Project editing is required only when a user screen is created. Although captions for multi-language display may be created in this editing step, FANUC recommends that Multi INput be used. Multi-language batch input sets captions in the sheets for a language selected with Setting of project as an output language. When a screen is re-created (converted) with FPAssist, select all sheets and click the Write button to reset multi-language captions with the multi-language batch input tool.

CAUTION:Important After standard screen captions created with

FPAssist have been read into batch input Excel sheets, you should use Min input to modify the captions or add new ones. Even if the captions in FPAssist sheets have been changed, these captions are overwritten with multi-language captions written by batch input.

Create a new project (See Subsections 4.2.1 and 4.3.1.)

Setting of Project Make settings in the Select Language dialog box (See Subsection 4.3.3.)

Create flow diagnostic messages in four languages according to Appendix C.3.

Include a standard screen for Toyota Motor in a language set as the output language with Assistant. (See Chapter 7.)

Create and edit a user screen with Edit Project. (See Subsection 4.3.4.)

The following steps are the same as those in Subsection 4.2.1: Composite Screen (See Subsection 4.3.9.) Make MEM (See Subsection 4.3.7.) Write to card (See Subsection 4.3.8.) Download the screen data to the CNC. (See Chapter 5.)

With Multi Input, captions in all three languages can be set at a time. Write multi-language captions to screens. (See Chapter 8.)


- 27 -

4.3 SETTING A MENU FUNCTION

4.3.1 CREATING A NEW PROJECT Create a new project according to the procedure below. <1> Click New Project on the menu.

A dialog box for entering a project name appears.

<2> Click ... to display the Browse for Folder dialog box.

<3> Select a folder where to create a project, then click OK.

The selected folder name is set in Directory Name.


- 28 -

<4> Enter a desired project name in Project Name, then click OK. <5> In the dialog box indicated below, you can select from:

a) Creating a new project. b) Restoring a project from existing screen data (MEM file) When creating a new project, click the radio button for Get from Template. When restoring a project from existing screen data, click the radio button for Get from MEM File.

When Get from Template is selected Select this option when creating a new machine operator's panel screen. When both FPAssist for Excel95 and that for Excel200 have been installed, you can select the edition to use for the development. When you click OK, a new project is created, and Visual Basic is activated. Under a folder specified in Directory Name, a folder named according to Project Name is created, and those files that are needed for machine operator's panel screen development are copied into the folder. Subfolders automatically created and their purposes are described below. The files under these subfolders are compressed and saved together with screen data at MEM creation time. \PhotoData:

Subfolder where image data files to be displayed on the fault detail screen of the troubleshooting guidance screen or the flow diagnostic screen is placed

\UserFrm: When creating a user-created screen with FANUC PICTURE, a form file is placed in this subfolder. The pattern form (FANUC.frm) for user screen creation is copied. Create a necessary dedicated screen (form) based on the pattern form with Microsoft Visual Basic, and save the created screen in this folder according to the form alias save method.


- 29 -

When Get from MEM File is selected Select this option when restoring a project from existing screen data (MEM file). This option is used, for example, to edit screen data saved from the CNC with the batch backup function of the CNC. Clicking OK displays a file dialog box for selecting a project restoration source file named CEX0FPDT.nnn (nnn: Number starting with 000, or MEM). Specify a desired MEM file. Clicking Open expands the file compressed and stored in the MEM file, and copies the file into the project folder. From this file, the project with which the selected screen data was created can be restored.

When the operator's panel screen for the restored project has been created for multi-language display, the dialog box below appears, prompting you to start the tool for creating an Excel sheet for multi-language batch input. Click the desired button. Normally, you should click the Yes button to create an Excel sheet for multi-language batch input. For an explanation of operations of the multi-language batch input tool, see Chapter 8, “MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL”.


- 30 -

4.3.2 OPENING A PROJECT This function is used to select a project already created. Click Open Project on the menu. The Open dialog box appears. Select a project file (xxx.fpp) in the desired project folder, then click Open.

At this stage, just specify a desired project folder and project file name only. Actual editing is performed using Edit Project and Assistant.

4.3.3 Setting a Project Set items common to an entire project. When a new project has been created, a setting is made to disable the multi-language display function. When you check the check box below to select the multi-language display function, the multi-language default settings below are applied.

Selection of multi-language function

□ The Multi-language display function is used. (Unchecked)

Method of switching Multi-language display →

The display language parameter of CNC is used. (Dimmed to indicate unavailability)

No. Select Multi-language key Param bit Comment Select font of Ank

01 1 ENG Default English Single byte code and

Japanese

02 1 JPN 3102#0 Japanese,3102#0 Single byte code and

Japanese

03 1 POL 3190#2 Polish,3190#2 Single byte code and

Japanese 04 0 CHI 3190#6 Chinese,3190#6 Simplified Chinese

Uncheck "The Multi-language display function is used.” to create machine operator's panel screens in one language only, which is the FPAssist output language. Check "The Multi-language display function is used.” to enable multi-language display or to create machine operator's panel screens in Chinese only. The above radio button becomes no longer dimmed, and the default settings listed in the above table take effect. Normally, you need not change these language settings.


- 31 -

The machine tool builder should make only the two settings below. 1. Select: Select multiple languages for display on the operator's

panel. 2. Param bit: When a different display language is newly set as the

default, reset the parameter bit for the old language.

Setting of Multi-language When the [Setting of project] button is clicked, a dialog box as shown below appears. This dialog box is used to make settings related to multiple languages. According to the FPAssist output language, language keys are already registered in Nos. 01 to 04. (No01=English, 02=Japanese, 03=Polish, 04=Chinese) When you want to edit a language key already registered, double-click the number of the key in the No column. A dialog box for editing appears. Select "Simplified Chinese” in "Select font of Ank” only for Simplified Chinese display; do not select this option for the other languages.

The Multi-language display function is used. : To use the multi-language display function for a FPAssist or user

form screen, check this item. If this item is not checked, the batch tool cannot be used.

Method of switching Multi-language display Select one of the following two methods for changing the display

language on the CNC display:


- 32 -

The display language parameter of CNC is used. : To use the same parameter bits as the language bits of language

parameter Nos. 3102, 3119 and 3190 of the CNC to switch between languages prepared for the FPAssist or user form screen, select this option button.

The FPAssist screen or user form screen can be synchronized in the same language as on the CNC screen, but changing the language causes a power disconnection alarm.

The Multi-language display switch signal is used.(1Byte) : When switching between display languages prepared for the

FPAssist screen or user form screen is to be made by writing a language number associated with a display language in the PMC signal area, select this option button. When selecting this option, set the PMC area and PMC address shown below. In PMC ladders, a language number registered for a language key is written in the interface area to switch between languages. When 0 or a language number not registered is written, the default language is assumed.

PMC Area, PMC Address : When selecting "The Multi-language display switch signal is

used.(1Byte)" explained above, specify the type of the PMC signal area and its address to allocate the PMC signal area (1 byte).

Add button : A new language key is added. When editing an existing language

key, double-click No. Delete button : An existing language key is deleted. However, language keys Nos.

1 to 4 cannot be deleted. Remark : This item is automatically set when a key has been added. You

cannot change this item. This item is used as a suffix to identify a language associated with FANUC PICTURE.

ANK : This item indicates the display font used when the character type

of ANK is selected for a registered language key. The letters indicate font selections as shown below.

J: Single-byte code and Japanese font C: Simplified Chinese font


- 33 -

Select language In this dialog box, select display languages you want to install on the machine operator's panel, from the default language settings: English, Japanese, Polish, and Chinese.

Select: Check languages to install on the machine operator's panel. For

Polish or Chinese, check Option and then select the desired language in the Select Option box.

Default: Select one language as the default from the selected languages,

which is used if no bits are found to be on in the display language parameters for the machine operator's panel.

Language change setting When you click the Add button in the Setting of Multi-language tab or double-click the number in the No column for a key you want to change, you can register additional keys or edit data.


- 34 -

Select : Specify whether to perform language display of a registered

language key. To perform language display, check this item. Multi-language key : Specify a character string to distinguish the registered language.

The character string must consist of up to 20 characters and cannot contain any space.

Comment : You can provide a comment on the language key with up to 40

characters. Default display language : The default language key is set. The default is already set to

No1. Param bit : Parameter setting applied when the display language is changed

by using display language parameters of the CNC. If this parameter bit is 1, switching to this language is made. If the parameter bits of registered language keys are all set to 0, the default language is used for display. If the default setting is not found, the language registered at the beginning is used for display.

Reset this parameter bit for the language that is no longer used as the default display language for the machine operator's panel. See the comment, which contains the parameter number and bit number.

Number : A language number applied when multi-language display

switching is performed by signal. A language number that matches a number in the PMC area is used for display. If no number matches, or if number 0 (default language) is not found, the language registered at the beginning is used for display.

Select font of Ank: When the scaling factor for characters in FPAssist is 1 or ANK is

selected as the character type property of controls of FANUC PICTURE, specify the font type for full-size characters. To create screens in Chinese, select "Simplified Chinese”. To create screens in any of the other languages, select "Single byte code and Japanese”.

CAUTION

While FPAssist is open, never set a project. When you have set a project during FPAssist

editing, re-open FPAssist. This is also true for the multi-language batch input tool.


- 35 -

4.3.4 EDITING A PROJECT This function is used to create an operator's panel screen that is other than the standard screens for Toyota Motor and is dedicated to a machine tool builder. A project folder includes a subfolder named UserFrm, and this subfolder includes a pattern form named FANUC.frm. From the pattern form, create an operator's panel screen dedicated to a machine tool builder. Create a form with the same name as a user screen name set in [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] of FPAssist. (Example: If user-created screen name = "USER1" is set with FPAssist, create a subscreen named USER1.frm.) In the new form, create a subscreen to be called from this screen. For the screen creation method using FANUC PICTURE, refer to "FANUC PICTURE (Windows) Operator's Manual (B-66244EN)".

4.3.5 ACTIVATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

With FPAssist, the twenty-seven types of standard screens for Toyota Motor described in Section 2.2, "SCREENS CREATABLE WITH THE TOOL" can be created without using the screen editor function of FANUC PICTURE. When you click the Assistant button on the menu, MS Excel is activated, and the FPAssist work book is opened in the Excel window. Before FPAssist is activated, a target project must be selected using the New Project or Open Project button on the menu. (Note: Before FPAssist can be used, MS Excel Version 7.0 or MS Excel2000 must be installed on the personal computer.) FPAssist consists of multiple work sheets. When FPAssist is activated for the first time, the whole setting work sheet opens. The whole setting work sheet includes operation buttons for registering and deleting machine operator's panel screens and for menu button reassignment, a conversion button for creating screen data from data set in a work sheet, and so forth. For the method of using FPAssist, see Chapter 6.

FPAssist whole setting work sheet


- 36 -

4.3.6 Multi-Language Batch Input This menu button is used to set a list of all multi-language captions in all forms for a project at a time. For details, see Chapter 8, "MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL".

4.3.7 Creating Memory Card Format Data Convert FANUC PICTURE screen data created with FPAssist to memory card format data according to the procedure below. For a second MEM creation and later, the previous settings are displayed. Click Make MEM. The Making memory card file dialog box appears.

When Model A (Series 18i-LNA, Power Mate i-LNA) is used, select SB6 as the PMC model in the PMC type pull-down list box. When Model B (Series 18i-LNB) is used, select SB7. Select the FPSTRTUP screen from the Start-up screen pull-down list box. This screen is used to display the versions of the software products related to the machine operator's panel. So, be sure to select FPSTRTUP. Double-click RETURN in the form file list in the lower area of the dialog box. The Setting user screen dialog box appears.


- 37 -

Select SYSTEM-[i] C Executor in the Screen Number pull-down list box. In Key Caption, set the character string OPER to be displayed as a soft key on the CNC screen. Check the check box of Select flag to enable calling from the CNC screen. Click OK to return to the Making memory card file dialog box. Click OK in the Making memory card file dialog box to create memory card format data. When a memory card format file named Cex0fpdt.mem is created, the message "A memory card file has been created normally." is displayed. Clicking Detail in the Making memory card file dialog box enables options to be set when screen data is created. The option setting functions are available starting with overall edition E5.00 of FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist.

Optional functions Outline Signal Display Setting This option sets the function described in Section

2.8. The setting of this optional function cannot be changed.

NoAction Color Setting With this option, the color of a disabled button (embedded) among the actuator operation buttons on operation screens can be changed to a color specified here.

Signal Display Setting dialog box


- 38 -

NoAction Color Setting dialog box

Noaction color is changed.: Check box

Check this check box to change the background color of a disabled actuator button.

Color Select: Button When this button is pressed, the color setting dialog box appears. Select a desired color by clicking the mouse.


- 39 -

4.3.8 COPYING OPERATOR'S PANEL SCREEN DATA AND THE FP DRIVER TO A MEMORY CARD

Copy operator's panel screen data (CEX0FPDT.MEM) held on the personal computer and the FP driver (INTFPCEX.MEM) to a memory card according to the procedure below. The data files CEX1MCAL.MEM and CEX2NCAL.MEM for flow diagnosis is also copied at the same time. Click Write to card. The Write to card dialog box appears.

The file name (CEX0FPDT.MEM), creation date, and file size of screen data created using Make MEM are displayed. Check the creation date. Specify a screen data transfer destination. In this case, be sure to specify the memory card drive. MEM data is transferred to the root directory of the memory card drive. Usually, only screen data needs to be copied. When the FP driver also needs to be copied, however, check the check box for Transfer driver file for FANUC PICTURE. For screen data for the Series 18i-LNA/Power Mate i-LNA, "Transfer driver file for MODEL i-A:" is checked. For screen data for the Series 18i-LNB, "Transfer driver file for MODEL i-B:" is checked. (Based on model information set with FPAssist, the necessary driver side is automatically checked.) [Tip] The FP driver needs to be copied in one of three cases:

<1> When screen data is read into the CNC for the first time <2> When the FP driver is upgraded to the latest version <3> After replacement and initialization of the F-ROM of the

CNC Clicking OK executes copy operation.


- 40 -

CAUTION 1 If screens added with the Series 18i-LNB are not

used, the driver for MODEL i-A can be used also with the Series 18i-LNB. If this type of usage is selected, data held on the operator's panel such as tool exchange counter data and fault count data needs to be erased when screen data including added screen data dedicated to the Series 18i-LNB is created and installed on the CNC later on. So, care must be taken.

2 When screen data is written to the CNC with the function for batch restoration from the memory card, all files in the root directory of the memory card are written to the FROM of the CNC. So, ensure that no unnecessary files are present under the root directory. (Subfolders may be present.)

4.3.9 COMPOSITE SCREEN DISPLAY

When a machine operator's panel screen is created with FPAssist, its constituent screens (subscreens) such as a lamp screen, button screen, and menu screen are created separately one by one. With the composite screen display function, these subscreens can be combined for display on the personal computer. The same screen as actually displayed on the machine operator's panel can be checked on the screen of the personal computer.

CAUTION FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist Edition 7.00 does not

support composite screen display in Simplified Chinese.


- 41 -

4.3.9.1 Operation for Composite Screen Display Click the Composite Screen button. The dialog box shown below appears.

When you click the [Base Screen] pull-down list box, a list of screens (base screens) making up a machine operator's panel is displayed.

Among these screens, the screens other than MENU_P0 are the base screens that make up a machine operator's panel. These screen names are already set on the whole setting work sheet of FPAssist. In Sub Screens 1 through 5, the subscreens specified under a base screen are displayed. If a subscreen is switchable to the next screen with the screen switch button, a list of subscreen names is displayed in the pull-down list box of the subscreen as in the case of a base screen. <1> Select a desired base screen from the list box.


- 42 -

<2> Select a subscreen in Sub Screens 1 through 5 to determine a subscreen configuration.

<3> By clicking the Entry button, register the selected screen configuration. The registered screen configuration can be checked using the pull-down list box.

<4> By clicking the Delete button, a registered screen configuration can be deleted. Select a desired screen configuration from the pull-down list of the composite screen list box, then click the Delete button. Then, the selected screen configuration is deleted. If you check the check box for Delete all registered form, then click the Delete button, all screen configurations registered are deleted.

<5> When you click the Indicate button, a screen image is displayed on the personal computer according to the registered screen configurations. At this time, Visual Basic is automatically activated.

<6> Open the project explorer window of Visual Basic, then select and double-click a composite screen form. The objects of the form are displayed. This display represents the composite display of the entire screen.

In the example above, MANOPRTN (MANOPRTN000.frm) is selected and displayed.


- 43 -

4.3.9.2 Method of Composite Screen Output The method of printing out a composite screen with Visual Basic (abbreviated as VB) and Paint is indicated below.

CAUTION To collect bitmaps from a machine operator's panel

screen in Simplified Chinese, use the Ethernet-connected CNC screen display function.

<1> Choose [Project(P)] then <FPWin Property(E)> of VB. The

following dialog box appears:

Select a desired screen from the [Start-up Setting] list box, then

click the OK button. <2> Choose [Run(D)] then <Start(S)> of VB. After a while, the whole

of the selected screen appears. Adjust the right-hand and lower window frames.

<3> Press the ALT + Print Screen buttons on the keyboard to copy the

active window only to the clipboard. <4> Activate Paint available with the Windows OS.


- 44 -

NOTE When using Paint for a WORD document, for

example, open the WORD document at this time for incorporation into the document with [Edit(E)]-<Paint(P)>.

<5> Choose [Edit(E)]-<Paint(P)> of Paint. <6> Choose [File(F)]-<Print(P)> of Paint, then click OK in the dialog

box to print out screen data. 4.3.10 Assistant V-UP

FPAssist for Excel95 V2.11 or earlier can be upgraded to FPAssist for Excel2000. However, the Ver. UP button provided with FPAssist for Excel95 V2.11 or earlier cannot be used because it causes an error. Therefore, use [Assistant V-UP] for the upgrade. Before performing this operation, use [Open Project] to select the project to be edited. This upgrade operation can be used to restore degraded FPAssist in addition to upgrading normal FPAssist.

CAUTION When using both Excel95 and Excel2000 for

development, be sure to use Assistant V-UP in these menu buttons to perform the upgrade and restoration of FPAssist, regardless of the version of FPAssist.

The upgrading up process checks and displays the version of FPAssist in the selected project and the version of FPAssist that has been installed. Then follow dialog messages that appear to continue the upgrade.


- 45 -

CAUTION When you have upgraded the FANUC PICTURE &

FPAssist package software, you may need to upgrade the FPAssist tool or multi-language batch input tool as well.

For information about upgrading of the multi-language batch input tool, see Section 8.8.

5.DOWNLOADING SCREEN DATA TO THE CNC B-66254EN/05

- 46 -

5 DOWNLOADING SCREEN DATA TO THE CNC

The following files copied onto a memory card are downloaded to the CNC and written to the FROM in the CNC by following the steps explained below: 1 FP driver (INTFPCEX.MEM) 2 Operator's panel screen data (CEX0FPDT.MEM) 3 Machine flow diagnostic data (CEX1MCAL.MEM) 4 NC flow diagnostic data (CEX2NCAL.MEM) <1> Method using the batch save/restoration function

The method is summarized below. For details, refer to the maintenance manual of CNC used. • Insert the memory card into the card slot of the main control

unit. • Set the rotary switch to B. • Turn on the power to the control unit. • Check that the seven-segment indicator blinks "b". • Press the switch once to stop the blinking of "b". • Press the switch once again to change the display of the

seven-segment indicator to rotation display. • After a while, download operation is completed, and the

seven-segment indicator changes as follows: [0]: Completion of downloading of data including S-RAM

backup data Blinking of [3]:

Completion of downloading of data not including S-RAM backup data

NOTE This state occurs when operator's panel screen data

only or the FP driver data only is downloaded.

The following table describes F-ROM write errors. LED indication Error Action

1 (blinking) Installation failure (F-ROM fault)

Replace the F-ROM.

2 (blinking) No memory card inserted. Memory card fault

Confirm the memory card is inserted and try again. Use another memory card.

4 (blinking) The F-ROM area insufficient.

Relocate files in the F-ROM with the BOOT operation. See "Actions when the F-ROM area is insufficient" below.

• Turn off the power. • Extract the memory card. • Reset the rotary switch to 0. • Turn on the power again to start up the control unit with the

new screen data.

B-66254EN/05 5.DOWNLOADING SCREEN DATA TO THE CNC

- 47 -

<2> Method based on boot processing

Turn on the power while pressing the upper-left corner of the touch panel. The boot processing screen appears. Insert the memory card holding operator's panel screen data into the memory card slot located on the left side of the operator's touch panel. Then, write the data files related to the operator's panel into the F-ROM by using the SYSTEM DATA LOADING menu.

Actions when the F-ROM area is insufficient

When screen data is written into (downloaded to) the F-ROM, write operation may fail because the F-ROM area is insufficient. In this case, write operation may be enabled by using either or both of the two procedures below. If the area becomes insufficient even when the procedures are performed, consider a method of reducing the size of operator's panel screen by, for example, reducing the size of image data specified for flow diagnostic data. [1] When the contiguous area is insufficient due to the fragmentation

of the F-ROM, the following procedure can be used to eliminate the fragmentation. * The operations below must be done on the BOOT screen.

<1> Save all user files in the F-ROM onto the memory card. <2> Delete all user files in the F-ROM. <3> Write all user files saved onto the memory card back to

the F-ROM.

Types of user files Content F-ROM file name Description

PMC ladder PMC-SB User ladder PSL ladder PSLLAD(Series 18i-LNB) PSL ladder

CEX 2.0M FP control program CEX0FPDT CEX1MCAL CEX2NCAL

FP screen data Machine flow diagnostic data CNC flow diagnostic data

CEX3CTMN(Series 18i-LNB) Cycle monitor diagram collected data

Operator's panel screen software (FANUC PICTURE)

CEX7REFE(Series 18i-LNB) Cycle monitor reference diagram data

[2] The minimization function described in Section 6.7 can be used to reduce the size of the FP screen data (CEX0FPDT.MEM). For details, see Section 6.7.

6.OPERATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist) B-66254EN/05

- 48 -

6 OPERATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

B-66254EN/05 6.OPERATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

- 49 -

6.1 OVERVIEW OF FPAssist FPAssist is the screen creation support tool for facilitating the creation of standard screens for Toyota Motor. Standard screens for Toyota Motor can be created simply by entering character strings and colors to be used for buttons and lamps and related signal addresses in the FPAssist work sheets. The FPAssist work book consists of a whole setting work sheet and a work sheet for each screen. When FPAssist is activated for the first time, only the whole setting work sheet is displayed. By registering operator's panel screens in the whole setting work sheet, a work sheet is created and displayed for each screen. The whole setting work sheet is a work sheet used not to set screen-specific information but to set information common to the operator's panel. The whole setting work sheet has operation buttons for registering screens with menu buttons, deleting registered screens, and changing screen assignment to menu buttons, and a conversion button for creating screen data from data set in a work sheet. The method of using each button provided on the whole setting work sheet is described below.

Whole setting work sheet


- 50 -

6.2 REGISTERING/CHANGING/DELETING OPERATOR'S PANEL SCREENS

Operation buttons for assigning machine operator's panel screens to menu buttons, deleting screens already assigned to menu buttons, and changing screen assignment to menu buttons are available.

6.2.1 Create This button is used to create a new screen and assign it to a menu button. Select a free screen number (line) in [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration], then click the Create button. The following dialog box appears:

Screen No indicates a selected screen number. Enter a desired screen name in Screen, and select a function from the combo box of Function, then click OK. A work sheet is created under the specified screen name, and the new screen is set in the screen list of [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration]. In Screen, enter a screen name consisting of an alphanumeric character string not longer than 8 half-size characters. In Comment, enter a comment as required. An entered comment is displayed in the Screen comment column. If User screen creation is selected in Function, create, in the UserFrm subfolder, a subscreen with the same name as specified in Screen, by using FANUC PICTURE. Function includes functions dedicated to the Series 18i-LNB. To register a screen for the Series 18i-LNB, enable the model B expansion function in the whole setting work sheet.


- 51 -

6.2.2 Move This button is used to change the screen number (= menu button assignment location) of a screen already created. In the screen list of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet, select (click) the screen name of a screen whose number is to be changed. Then, click the Move button. The following dialog box appears:

Select a move destination screen number from the combo box, or enter a move destination screen number on the keyboard, then click the OK button.

6.2.3 Del This button is used to delete a screen already created. In the screen list of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet, select (click) the screen name of a screen to be deleted. Then, click the Del button. The following dialog box appears:

Check the screen number and screen name displayed in the dialog box, then click the OK button. The confirmation dialog box shown below appears. Then, click the OK button. The selected screen is deleted from the screen list, and the work sheet for that screen is deleted.


- 52 -

6.2.4 Copy This button is used to create a new screen by copying an existing screen. In the screen list of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet, select (click) the screen name of a copy source screen. Then click the Copy button. The dialog box shown below appears.

Enter desired data in Screen No and Screen name of the copy destination, then click the OK button. The new screen is added to the screen list, and a work sheet with the set screen name is created. The new work sheet has the same data as set for the copy source.

6.2.5 Rename This button is used to rename an existing screen. In the screen list of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet, select (click) the screen name of a screen to be renamed. Then, click the Rename button. The following dialog box appears:

Enter a new screen name in New screen name, then click the OK button. The screen name displayed in the screen list and the name of the work sheet are changed to the specified new screen name.


- 53 -

6.3 CHECKING SCREEN DATA Each work sheet of FPAssist has a Check button for each setting table. The Check button enables you to check if data set is correct. The Check all button of the whole setting work sheet enables you to check all screen data by a single operation without clicking the Check button of each work sheet. (The function for checking all screens is available only with E3.00 and later.)

6.4 CONVERTING DATA To create screen data from a work sheet of FPAssist, click the Convert button of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet. Set necessary data in all work sheets and complete the checking of all pages, then click the Convert button. Those property values such as names, colors, and PMC addresses that are set in the work sheets are written into a screen template created using FANUC PICTURE to create screen data. With FPAssist created for Excel2000, clicking the Convert button displays the following conversion function selection dialog box:

To create screen data for the first time from the worksheet of FPAssist, select "all the screen data". If only a part of the screen data of the worksheet is converted in subsequent screen data creation, screen data conversion can be speeded up by selecting "modified screen data only". Even in this case, "all the screen data" may be selected to create screen data.


- 54 -

6.5 VERSION DISPLAY Click the Version button of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet to display the version information of FPAssist. With Excel2000 Version 6.01 and later, the FPAssist form converted version for the multi-language display function is displayed as well. (Note that the version of FPAssist differs from the version of the batch input tool.) When making an inquiry about this software, obtain the version number displayed by clicking the Version button.

6.6 UPGRADING TO THE LATEST VERSION Click the Ver. up button of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet to transport the screen data set in FPAssist currently opened to data of FPAssist of the version installed on the personal computer. This function is used to upgrade data created with FPAssist of an old version to data of FPAssist of the latest version. This function is also used to restore a minimized FPAssist sheet.

6.7 MINIMIZATION Click the Minimize button of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet to reduce a FPAssist work sheet to a minimum size. A minimized FPAssist work sheet becomes a work sheet consisting of setting data, so that the operations described in this chapter are disabled for the work sheet. (All operation buttons except the Ver. up button are eliminated.) By minimizing FPAssist work sheets, the size of screen data occupying the F-ROM of the CNC can be reduced. A minimized FPAssist work sheet can be restored by upgrading to the latest version. This operation restores a FPAssist work sheet to the original work sheet, and also replaces FPAssist with FPAssist of the version currently installed on the personal computer. (This function is available only with E3.00 and later.)

B-66254EN/05 7.SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)

- 55 -

7 SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPAssist)


- 56 -

7.1 SCREEN CREATION PROCEDURE USING FPAssist The flowchart below shows the procedure for creating an operator's panel screen with FPAssist.

Activate FPAssist

Register necessary screens in the screen registration table in the whole setting work sheet

Set values in work sheet of each screen

Check setting data with Check

button

Create screen data from work sheets with Convert button

Data setting completed for all screens?

To MEM creation

NG

No

Yes

OK


- 57 -

7.2 SCREEN REGISTRATION AND SETTING OF THE ENTIRE SYSTEM

7.2.1 Edition Display Screen

Immediately after the power to the CNC system is turned on and the system is activated, the operator's touch panel displays the edition display screen (shown below). This screen displays the name and creation date of operator's panel data, and the edition information of the software products related to FANUC PICTURE. When the time set in Edition screen timer (sec) (N8) of [Setting of the entire system (2/4) Setting of global screen] (setting table 2/4) has elapsed after this screen is displayed, the screen display automatically switches to the screen set in Startup screen (G2) of setting table 2/4. If you click the Hold Screen button while this screen is displayed, screen switching is not performed, but the edition display screen continues to be displayed until you click the Operator Panel button. When you click the Operator Panel button in this state, the screen display switches to the screen set in Startup screen (G2). The Data Name/Edition field of this screen displays the data entered in the Data name/edition field at the top of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet (setting table 1/4). The system sets the other display items. (This function is available with E2.00 and later.) The SETTING OP. TIME button is available with FPAssist Version 5.10 and later.


- 58 -

7.2.2 Operation Time Setting Screen When the SETTING OP. TIME button displayed on the right side of the edition display screen, the screen display switches to the operation time setting screen shown below. This screen enables the setting of operation time to be modified from the operator's panel screen. This screen has the input items SETTING HOLIDAYS and Fault accumulation method. By setting these items, the definition of a time count target period of fault history data displayed on the fault count screen and the method of accumulation can be modified.

Display item Description "Operation time selection." SwitchTime button

This button is used to switch the method of fault count accumulation between fault stop time accumulation based on the operation time set using the FPAssist sheet (referred to as an initial value) and fault count accumulation based on the operation time set on this screen.

SETTING OF TIME SET.1, SET.2, SET.3

When, in "Operation time selection." (1) "Initial value" is selected: The time set using the FPAssist sheet is displayed. (2) "Screen setting" is selected: An operation time can be set on this setting screen.

The method of input and the meaning of an input value are the same as for the item set in "Operation Time Setting - Setting Table (3/4)" of the FPAssist sheet.

SETTING HOLIDAYS Four holiday periods when the factory stops for a long time can set. Faults that occur during the set periods are not subject to time accumulation. If 0 is specified as a start month and day and end month and day, the specification of no holiday is assumed. If a specified end month and day is earlier than a specified start month and day, the end month and day is treated as the same date of the next year.

"Fault accumulation method" SwitchType button

If a power failure involving faults occurs in a shift and extends to the next or subsequent shifts, this button is used to determine in which shift the fault time of that period is to be counted. (1) Conventional: The fault time is counted as data for the shift when the power is

turned on. As the result, a time longer than the work hours of the shift is counted.

(2) New type: The fault time is equally distributed over the shifts during the power failure.


- 59 -

7.2.3 Screen Switch Menu Basically, one of the screen switch menus shown below is displayed at the right edge of each operator's panel screen. Two types of screen switch menus are available: a 4-button menu that has four screen switch buttons, and a 5-button menu that has five screen switch buttons. Up to four pages can be created for one of the two types of menus. At the lowest part of a screen switch menu, a page switch button is provided. The page switch button enables you to switch between the screen switch menu pages. When you touch a screen switch button on the screen switch menu, the screen assigned to the button is displayed on the operator's panel.

BTN01

BTN02

BTN03

BTN04

2/3

BTN01

BTN02

BTN03

BTN04

1/3

BTN01

BTN02

BTN03

BTN04

3/3

BTN01

BTN02

BTN03

BTN04

BTN05

1/3

4-button menu 5-button menu

Screen switch button

Page switch button

Screen switch menu


- 60 -

7.2.4 Registering Screens To assign a screen to a screen switch button, register the screen in the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet (setting table 1/4) of FPAssist. In the table of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet, select (click) a screen switch button (BTN01 to BTN05) with which the screen is to be registered. Then, register the screen with the Create button. For the method of registration, see Section 6.2(1), "Create". When a screen is registered, the screen is assigned to a screen switch button on the screen switch menu, and a work sheet for screen creation is created. If a screen is registered in a spare line (line 21 to line 25) of setting table 1/4, a work sheet is created for the screen, but the screen is assigned to no screen switch button. The figure below shows the correspondence between the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet and the screen switch menu. Whether to use the 5-button menu or 4-button menu is determined by the setting of Switching mode (N1) of the setting table (2/4). The 5-button menu can be used only when the Numerical Value Switching button is not used on each operation screen and the operation display screen. The cycle time setting screen is called from the cycle time measurement screen. So, the cycle time setting screen need not be assigned to a screen switch button of the screen switch menu. Accordingly, set the cycle time setting screen in a spare line (line 21 to line 25) of the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet.

Manual

Tool Ex g

Fault Display

NC Operat

1/3

Tool cm p

Cycle

Fault

NC Screen

2/3

Guidance

FLOW DIAG OP

ST ATU S Running

Stat us

3/3

Page1

Page2

Page3


- 61 -

7.2.5 Screen Registration - Setting Table (1/4) This setting table consists of fields for setting the name, version, and language of an operator's panel to be created, and columns for registering screens to be created. For details, see the descriptions below.

← → Create Move CopyRenameDel Convert Version Ver. Up MinimizeCheck all[Setting of the entire system(1/4) Screen registration]

0 System name: G1_1 Data path: S33 Data name/edition: S304 Comment: S40 No. of menu pages: N3 Language N4

530Enhanced function for MODEL-B 0:Disable 1:Enable 1

No Pg Btn. name Screen name Function Name No. of Screen selected Blinking Mode Screen commentrows address address

1 BTN01 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S322 BTN02 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S323 1 BTN03 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S324 BTN04 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S325 BTN05 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S326 BTN01 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S327 BTN02 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S328 2 BTN03 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S329 BTN04 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S32

10 BTN05 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S3211 BTN01 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S3212 BTN02 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S3213 3 BTN03 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S3214 BTN04 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S3215 BTN05 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S3216 BTN01 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S3217 BTN02 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S3218 4 BTN03 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S3219 BTN04 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S3220 BTN05 G1 K1 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 A1_1 A1_2 N2 S3221 Spare G1 K1 S3222 Spare G1 K1 S3223 Spare G1 K1 S3224 Spare G1 K1 S3225 Spare G1 K1 S32

G1 : Screen name consisting of a character string not longer than 8 alphanumeric characters. The name entered in Screen of the New screen registration dialog box is set. If you select NC screen as the screen function (K1), specify 70 as the screen name. (At screen registration time, 70 is automatically set.)

G1_1 : A project name set at project creation time is displayed. (This setting cannot be changed.)

K1 : Screen function name. For both G1 and K1, make a selection in the combo box of the New screen registration dialog box. Do not directly enter data in this sheet. When calling an NC screen, select NC Screen as the function name, and specify the key code of the NC screen as the screen name. The default is 70. Usually, use the default. (See the description of the C language executor.)

S8 : Character string (8 half-size characters (recommended), not longer than 9 half-size characters) to be displayed on a screen switch button. Up to three lines can be specified. For a manual operation screen, a character string formed by combining up to the second line is displayed as the screen title at the upper-left corner of the screen.

A1_1 : Set the address of a signal that is turned on when the desired screen is selected.

A1_2 : Address of a signal for blinking a screen switch button. (Each signal is used by the system, and cannot be changed.)

N1 : Number of lines of a character string displayed on a screen switch button. (3 lines max.)


- 62 -

N2 : Set whether to use (1)/not use (0) the screen switch buttons. (When no data is entered, the specification of 0 is assumed.)

N3 : Number of pages of screen switch buttons (menu) S32,S40: A comment on the system and individual screens can be

entered. S33 : The path to the folder where the template of a standard

screen is stored is indicated. When FANUC PICTURE is installed, the template is copied into a specified installation path together with FANUC PICTURE and FPAssist. Usually, AUTO is displayed in this cell of the sheet. In this case, however, the template in the installation path is automatically used. So, usually, the data of this cell need not be changed. Only when a template other than the installed template needs to be used, specify the path to the folder where the template is stored.

S30 : Enter the name of an operator's panel and the edition of data. A character string entered here is displayed in the edition display screen that appears on the touch panel screen when the power is turned on. Enter a character string not longer than 30 half-size characters. (This function is available with E2.00 and later.)

N4 : By using a number from 0 to 2, specify a language used with a screen to be created. (0: Japanese, 1: English, 2: Polish) In accordance with this setting, the language of screen-displayed characters not entered by the user but output by FANUC PICTURE in a fixed manner is switched. This setting can be changed at any time. (This function is available with E3.00 and later.)

With E5.00 and later, if even the same output language number is input, the default caption of FPAssist is set again in the language corresponding to the number. If the FPAssist sheet is upgraded to a new version, for example, this operation can incorporate the default caption additions/changes made with the new version.

N5 : 0: When an operator's panel screen for the Series 18i-LNA or PMi-LNA is created

1: When an operator's panel screen for the Series 18i-LNB is created

(This function is available with FPAssist Version 5.10 and later.)

NOTE When using FANUC PICTURE of E2.00 or earlier,

be sure to define the screens listed below. If a screen is not used, assign the screen to a menu key and set Mode = 0, or set the screen in a spare line. - NC operation screen - Tool exchange counter screen - Fault count screen - Cycle time measurement screen - Cycle time setting screen


- 63 -

7.2.5.1 Default name button The Default name button has been added to function setting sheets of FPAssist Version 6.00 and later. This button re-sets the characters (a language set as the output language) always output by FANUC PICTURE for each function setting sheet. To re-set the characters for all screens, set the output language for whole setting. Target cells are indicated in light gray. In light gray cells, a fixed character string that can be changed is set. When the version of a project has been upgraded, a default caption is sometimes not set in a newly added target cell depending on the combination of the old version and new version. In such a case, press the Default name button. This button is added to the following function setting sheets:

Function sheets to which the Default name button is added

Whole setting NC operation screen Operational situation screen Load torque monitor screen Safety IO status display screen


- 64 -

7.2.6 Automatic Screen Switching, Initial Screen Setting, etc. - Setting Table (2/4)

By setting the names of screens and signal addresses for calling those screens in the automatic screen switching setting area of setting table 2/4, screen display can be switched with a ladder program instruction of the PMC. In automatic screen switching setting table (1), usually, the names of screens for automatic screen switching are already entered. So, set a screen name and calling signal address for each screen. This table has a priority order defined. The buzzer stop screen entered at the top of the table has the highest priority, and lower entries have lower priorities. If multiple calling signals are set to 1 simultaneously, the calling signals are processed according to this priority order. The operation of the operator's panel for each calling signal depends on whether the automatic mode or manual mode is set as described below. The description below, however, does not apply to the buzzer stop screen. • When the automatic mode is set

When a calling signal is set to 1, the screen display switches to the screen corresponding to the signal. If multiple calling signals are set to 1 simultaneously, the screen with the highest priority is displayed. When the calling signal for the screen with the highest priority is set to 0 in this state, the screen display switches to the screen with the next priority.

• When the manual mode is set If the screen currently displayed is set in the automatic screen switching setting table, and the calling signal for a screen with a higher priority is set to 1, the screen switch button (menu) corresponding to the signal blinks. If multiple calling signals are set to 1 simultaneously, the screen switch button corresponding to the screen with the highest priority blinks. When the calling signal for the screen with the highest priority is set to 0 in this state, the screen switch button corresponding to the calling signal for the screen with the next priority blinks. The calling signal for a screen with a priority lower than the priority of the screen currently displayed is ignored. If the screen currently displayed is not set in the automatic screen switching setting table, the priority of the screen is assumed to be the lowest.

• Operation of the buzzer stop screen The buzzer stop screen is called when the calling signal is set to 1, regardless of whether the automatic mode or manual mode is set, and the subscreen shown below is displayed at the center over the current screen. When the calling signal is set to 0, the buzzer stop screen is erased, and the screen display returns to the previous state. If you press the buzzer stop button on the buzzer stop screen when the buzzer stop screen is displayed, the buzzer OFF signal is output. This signal continues to be 1 until the calling signal for the buzzer stop screen is set to 0. While the buzzer stop screen is displayed, operations other than the pressing of the buzzer stop button, such as a screen switch


- 65 -

operation, are rejected. So, a ladder must be created to ensure that the buzzer stop screen is erased when the buzzer stop button is pressed. Usually, create a PMC ladder so that the calling signal for the buzzer stop screen is set to 1 on the rising edge of an event that causes the buzzer to sound, and is set to 0 when the buzzer OFF signal is output.

• Operation of the caution message screen

If the actuator button is pressed in a mode other than the manual mode (when manual selection signal = 0), button operation is blocked, and the caution message screen pops up at the center of the screen. This screen disappears when the OK button is pressed. Alternatively, the caution message screen automatically disappears when the time set in Caution screen delete time (sec) of the setting table has elapsed. A message to be displayed in this screen is to be set in Caution message of the setting table. The default is shown below. The display of the caution message screen can be disabled by setting the caution message inhibit signal set at the bottom of the [Pop-up screen settings] table to 1.

To call a user screen or a screen not listed in automatic screen

switching setting table (1) from a ladder program, use automatic screen switching setting table (2). From the combo box, select the name of a screen to be called. Next, set the address of the calling signal. Then, by using the column of the order of priority designated signals at the left end of automatic screen switching setting table (2), set the priority of the screen in the priority order set in automatic screen switching setting table (1). The priority of the screen is set to follow the priority of the screen selected with the combo box in the column of the order of priority designated signals. Higher entries in automatic screen switching setting table (2) have higher priorities. So, if the same screen name is set more than once in the column of the order of priority designated signals, the higher entries have higher priorities. (The function of automatic screen switching setting table (2) is available with E2.17 and later.)


- 66 -

[Setting of the entire system(2/4) Setting of global screen]-1OK

Auto screen switching Screen name Address [Pop-up screen settings]Buzzer stop part A1_1Manual selection G1 A1_1 High Char. stringEquipment fault P1 G1 A1_1NC related fault G1 A1_1 Name label S4Tool P1 stop G1 A1_1 Prev. value label S6Tool P2 stop G1 A1_1 Key-in value label S6Tool P3 stop G1 A1_1 Clear button label S8Tool P1 forecast G1 A1_1 Key del button S8Tool P2 forecast G1 A1_1 P Input button S8Tool P3 forecast G1 A1_1 R Caution inhibit address A1_8Tool P1 prec.forecast G1 A1_1 ITool P2 prec.forecast G1 A1_1 OTool P3 prec.forecast G1 A1_1 R Char. string No. ofCompensation P1 limit G1 A1_1 I rowsCompensation P2 limit G1 A1_1 T Caution message S26 S26 S26 N6Compensation P3 limit G1 A1_1 Y Buzzer stop msg S26 S26 S26 N6Compensation P4 limit G1 A1_1Compensation P5 limit G1 A1_1Compensation P6 limit G1 A1_1Compensation P7 limit G1 A1_1 Startup screen G2 1Compensation P8 limit G1 A1_1Compensation P9 limit G1 A1_1Compensation P10 limit G1 A1_1Compensation P11 limit G1 A1_1 The order of priority designated signal screen na CallCompensation P12 limit G1 A1_1 (The next order of the designated screen is take Screen name addressQuality check P1 G1 A1_1 Tool address FLTLIST A1_11Quality check P2 G1 A1_1 Spare screen ALPHAI A1_11Spare screen G1 A1_1 Low FIXMAINT A1_11

SAFETYIO A1_11Buzzer OFF execution addr. A1_2 CYCLEMON A1_11Manual selection addr. A1_3 TORQUE A1_11Execution button addr. A1_4 A1_11

A1_11Switching mode(0:4-btn,1:5-btn) N1 A1_11Operation button automatic off time (sec) N2 A1_11Caution screen delete time (sec) N3 A1_11Back-light off inhibit addr. A1_5Back-light off time (min) N4"Acquired alarm code" signal address A1_6"Read alarm code" signal address A1_7Alarm code (WORD size) address A2Alarm expiration time (sec) N5Alarm counter initialization signal A1_9Cycle time counter initialization A1_10Initialization signal on time (sec) N7Edition screen timer (sec) N8

MANOP

G3G3G3G3G3G3G3G3G3G3G3

G4G4G4G4G4G4G4G4G4G4G4

G2

The default caution message and default buzzer stopmessage are as follows:Caution message: Not in MANUAL mode.Buzzer stop message: Touch this button to stop buzzer.

Automatic screen switching setting table (1)

Automatic screen switchingsetting table (2)

← →CHECK

G1 : Name of a screen to be called automatically A1_1 : Address of an automatic screen calling signal. To call a

screen such as a flow diagnostic screen automatically when a CNC alarm is issued, set the automatic screen calling signal set here to 1 by using the NC alarm (NCAL) signal output on the M-NET interface.

A1_2 : Specify the address of the buzzer OFF signal output when the buzzer stop screen is touched.

A1_3, 4: Address where the manual selection signal and execution button signal are input

A1_5 : Address of the back-light off inhibit signal. While this signal is on, the back-light is not turned off.

A1_6 : Address of the "acquired alarm code" signal output when the operator's panel receives an alarm code for the guidance screen

A1_7 : Address of the "read alarm code" signal output from the PLC after an alarm code for the guidance screen is set


- 67 -

A1_8 : Address of the signal for disabling the display of the caution message screen

A1_9, A1_10 : Specify the addresses of signals for initializing the values (including the past measured values) of the alarm counter and cycle time counter.

A2 : Address for setting an alarm code (16-bit binary code) for the guidance screen

N1 : Set whether to use a 4-button menu or 5-button menu. 0: 4-button menu, 1: 5-button menu

N2 : Set a time required until the operation button (actuator button) selection state is released. If 0 is set, automatic release is disabled. This setting is applicable to all screens. (0 to 9999 seconds)

N3 : Set a time required until the caution window displayed when the actuator button is pressed in a mode other than the manual mode is automatically erased. (0 to 99 seconds)

N4 : Set a time in minutes from the last touch operation until the back-light is turned off. (0 to 255 minutes)

N5 : If an alarm code is not input when the time set here has elapsed, the operator's panel assumes that the alarm is released. For details, see the descriptions of the troubleshooting guidance screen and flow diagnostic screen.

N6 : Number of lines of character strings displayed in the caution message screen and buzzer stop screen. (3 lines max.)

N7 : Set a time width used to regard the signals input in A1_9 and A1_10 as valid. A signal with a width shorter than the time width set here is not assumed to be an initialization signal. (0 to 99 seconds)

N8 : When the power is turned on, the edition display screen of FANUC PICTURE is displayed on the touch panel for the time set here. When the time set here has elapsed, the screen display automatically switches to the initial screen set in G1_1. If you touch the Hold Screen button on the screen while the edition display screen is displayed, the edition display screen continues to be displayed until you touch the Operator Panel button, regardless of the value set in this item. (0 to 999 seconds)

G2 : From the combo box, select the name of an operator's panel screen to be displayed first after the edition display screen.

S4, S6, S8 : Set character strings to be displayed in the ten-key pad for numeric value setting. As the defaults, the character strings indicated to the right of the table are set.

The setting is unchangeable with FPAssist Version 5.10 and later.

S26 : Set character strings to be displayed on the caution message screen and buzzer stop screen. When the default character strings are satisfactory, no modification is needed.

G3 : Set the priority of a screen to be called. The priority after a screen selected from the combo box is set.

G4 : From the combo box, select a screen name to be called from the ladder program.

A1_11 : Address of a calling signal


- 68 -

7.2.7 Shift Time Setting - Setting Table (3/4)

[Setting of entire system(3/4) Shift information settings]-1

OKSet 1 Set 2 Set 3 title

Setting Valid/Invalid N1 N1 N1 Shift 1 2 3Shift start time(H) N2 N2 N2 1 shift TODAY BEFORE 1 WEEKShift start time(M) N3 N3 N3 2-3 shif CURRENT PREV. 5 SHIFTSShift start day of the week N4 CommonShift end time(H) N2 N2 N2Shift end time(M) N3 N3 N3Shift end day of the week N4 CommonThe number of break time N5 Common1st.break start time(H) N2 N2 N21st.break start time(M) N3 N3 N31st.break end time(H) N2 N2 N21st.break end time(M) N3 N3 N32nd.break start time(H) N2 N2 N22nd.break start time(M) N3 N3 N32nd.break end time(H) N2 N2 N22nd.break end time(M) N3 N3 N33rd.break start time(H) N2 N2 N23rd.break start time(M) N3 N3 N33rd.break end time(H) N2 N2 N23rd.break end time(M) N3 N3 N3

In shift signal address A1_1In break signal address A1_2

In this table, set character strings to be displayedon the fault count screen and operationalsituation screen. When the default characterstrings are satisfactory, no modification isneeded.

← →CHECK

N1 : Indicates whether Set1, Set2 and Set3 are valid or invalid.

Valid = 1, Invalid = 0 Set3 is set when a three-shift work system is employed. The

table below indicates the three valid combinations of Set1, Set2, and Set3. Do not set any other combinations.

When three-shift work is set on the operation time setting screen of the operator's panel, specify operation time accumulation per shift for two or more shifts.

(The Set3 function is available with FPAssist Version 5.10 and later.)

Set1 Set2 Set3 Operation time accumulation unit 1 0 0 Accumulation per day 1 1 0 Accumulation per shift for two shifts per day 1 1 1 Accumulation per shift for three shifts per day

N2 : Set hour data for a shift start time, shift end time, break start

time, and break end time with the 24-hour system. N3 : Set minute data for a shift start time, shift end time, break

start time, and break end time. N4 : Set a shift start day of the week and shift end day of the

week.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday A1_1 : The in-shift signal is output to an address set here. A1_2 : The in-break signal is output to an address set here.


- 69 -

7.2.8 Output of Internal Operator's Panel Data - Setting Table (4/4) With FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist E2.14 and later, the data managed within the operator's panel and listed below can be transferred to the D area of the PMC. Data transferred to the PMC with this function can be further transferred to the host computer with a function such as the FL-net function and FOCAS1 function. Thus, the host computer can taken in data displayed on the operator's panel. For the layout of data transferred to the D area of the PMC and the method of data transmission control for using the FL-net function, see Appendix D, "METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA".

Screen name Type of data Amount of dataStop counter value 4 Byte x 48 Tool change

counter Current counter value 4 Byte x 48 Standard total cycle time 2 Byte Cycle time

measurement Total cycle time(10 times) 2 Byte x 10 Fault number list Fault number of times(today) 2 Byte x 284

Equipment fault number(Today) 2 Byte Equipment fault acc. Time(Today) 4 Byte Tool change number(Today) 2 Byte Tool change acc. Time(Today) 4 Byte Quality check number(Today) 2 Byte Quality check acc. Time(Today) 4 Byte Continuous off number(Today) 2 Byte Continuous off acc. Time(Today) 4 Byte Parts full number(Today) 2 Byte Parts full acc. Time(Today) 4 Byte No part number(Today) 2 Byte No part acc. Time(Today) 4 Byte Cycle time (Today) 2 Byte Machined part(Today) 4 Byte Operation rate(Today) 4 Byte

Operational situation

OK part rate(Today) 4 Byte Setting table (4/4)

N1: Set whether to use the function for transferring operator's panel

data to the PMC. (0: Not use, 1: Use)


- 70 -

A1: Specify an operator's panel data transfer destination PMC address. Only an address in the D area can be specified. Usually, 1,024 bytes from the end of the D area are used. In this case, specify 6976. A specifiable address is a multiple of 4. If an address other than a multiple of 4 is specified, the specified address is rounded to the multiple of 4 that is closest to and smaller than the specified value.

N2: Set 1 when operator's panel data transferred to the D area is to be transferred to the host computer with the FL-net function. Set 0 when the FL-net function is not used, for example, when operator's panel data is transferred to the host computer with the FOCAS1 function or is processed by a PMC ladder. (0: Not use FL-net, 1: Use FL-net)

A2: When data is transferred between the PMC and host computer with the FL-net function, a communication interface area needs to be allocated in the R area of the PMC. In this item, set the address of a transmission interface area used for the message transmission server function with confirmation. The 20 bytes starting at the address set here is used as the interface area. In this item, set only a numeric value with address word R omitted.

A3: In this item, set the address of a receive interface area used for the message transmission server function with confirmation of FL-net. The 12 bytes starting at the address set here is allocated as the interface area in the R area. In this item, set only a numeric value with address word R omitted.


- 71 -

7.3 FAULT DISPLAY SCREEN The fault display screen consists of 63 lamps (LMP01-63) and 7 manual buttons (BTN01-07) arranged as shown below. The fault display screen is used to display fault states with lamps.

LMP01 LMP02 LMP03 LMP04 LMP05 LMP06 LMP07









BTN01 BTN02 BTN03 BTN04 BTN05 BTN06 BTN07

ManualOperatio

FaultDisplay

Tool Exchang

NC Operation

1/3


- 72 -

7.3.1 Components The specifications of the lamps and manual buttons that make up the screen are described below.

7.3.1.1 LMP01 to LMP63: Lamps These lamps provide the following indications according to the values of PMC addresses: • When a lamp is off

Chamfered rectangle with the frame in lamp ON color and the inside in lamp OFF color. The character string is displayed in the color corresponding to the lamp OFF color.

• When a lamp is on Chamfered rectangle with the lamp ON color. The character string is displayed in the color corresponding to the lamp ON color.

CAUTION

The lamps have no input for blinking.

7.3.1.2 BTN01 to BTN07: Manual buttons The manual buttons operate in one of five modes: operation mode 2 to operation mode 6. Operation mode 1 cannot be used.

<1> Operation mode 2: Momentary button A button is on while it is held down. A button is off when it is released. Depending on the ON or OFF state of a button, ON (1) or OFF (0) is output to the output address. Each button is displayed as follows:

Button state OFF ON Frame color Frame OFF color Frame ON color

Display lamp color Lamp OFF color Lamp ON color Character color Character OFF color Character ON color


- 73 -

<2> Operation mode 3: Momentary button with a lamp A lamp is on while it is held down. A lamp is off when it is released. Depending on the ON or OFF state of a button, ON (1) or OFF (0) is output to the output address. Depending on the state of a button, the display operation of the button varies as indicated below.

Button state OFF ON Lamp turn-on

address OFF ON OFF ON

Frame color Frame OFF color Frame ON color

Display lamp color Lamp OFF color

Lamp ON color

Lamp ON color

Lamp OFF color

Character color Character OFF color

Character ON color

Character ON color

Character OFF color

Blink operation Enabled Disabled If the value of a lamp blink address is ON when blink operation is enabled, ON display and OFF display are alternately repeated. (This operation is not performed when the value of the lamp turn-on address is ON.)

<3> Operation mode 4: Actuator button Each time a button is pressed, the button switches between the ON and OFF states. When a button is set to ON if a group number other than 0 is set, the other buttons of the same group number are set to OFF. Up to nine groups (1 to 9) can be set in one screen. Depending on the ON or OFF state of a button, ON (1) or OFF (0) is output to the output address. Depending on the state of a button, the display operation of the button varies as indicated below.



Frame color Frame OFF color Frame ON color Display lamp

color Lamp OFF

color Lamp ON

color Lamp OFF

color Lamp ON

color


Character ON color

Character OFF color

Character ON color

Blink operation Enabled Enabled If the value of a lamp blink address is ON when blink operation is enabled, ON display and OFF display are alternately repeated. (This operation is not performed when the value of the lamp turn-on address is ON.) In this mode, a button is inoperative when the value of the manual selection address is OFF. The state of a button does not change when the value of the execution button address is ON. In addition, when the screen display switches to another screen, the button output addresses are set to OFF.


- 74 -

<4> Operation mode 5: Alternate button A Each time a button is pressed, the button switches between the ON and OFF states. When a button is set to ON if a group number other than 0 is set, the other buttons of the same group number are set to OFF. Up to nine groups (1 to 9) can be set in one screen. Depending on the ON or OFF state of a button, ON (1) or OFF (0) is output to the output address. When the screen display switches to another screen, the buttons are set to OFF, and the output addresses are set to OFF. Except for the above, alternate button A operates in the same way as the momentary button with a lamp.



Frame color Frame OFF color

Frame ON color

Frame ON color

Frame OFF color

Display lamp color

Lamp OFF color

Lamp ON color

Lamp ON color

Lamp OFF color


Character ON color

Character ON color

Character OFF color

Blink operation Enabled Disabled

<5> Operation mode 6: Alternate button B Alternate button B operates in the same way as alternate button A except that even when the screen display switches to another screen, the buttons and output addresses preserve the original states.

NOTE The manual buttons do not operate in the lamp

mode (operation mode 1).


- 75 -

7.3.2 Lamp Setting - Setting Table (1/2)

S8 : Set a character string to be displayed on each fault display lamp.

(8 half-size characters (recommended), 9 half-size characters max.)

N1 : Number of lines of a character string above (2 lines max.) B1 : Set a type of character. (Half/full size: 1, Double height and

width size: 2, 6x size: 3) C1 : Specify the ON and OFF colors of each lamp.

Symbol W R G B O Y WB BL GL Lamp color White Red Green Blue Orange Yellow Light blue Black Gray

Character color Black White Black White Black Black Black White Black When a lamp is set to OFF, the ON color frame is displayed. A1 : Set the address of a signal for turning on each lamp.


- 76 -

7.3.3 Button Area Setting - Setting Table (2/2)

S8: Set a character string to be displayed on each button. (8 half-size

characters (recommended), 9 half-size characters max.) N1: Number of lines of a character string above (4 lines max.) B1: Set a type of character. (Half/full size: 1, Double height and

width size: 2, 6x size: 3) C1: Specify the ON and OFF colors of the display lamp and frame of

each button. N2: Select a type of button from the following:

2: Momentary button 3: Momentary button with a lamp 4: Actuator button 5: Alternate button A 6: Alternate button B

N3: When the actuator button or alternate button A/B is selected, set a group. (In one group, only one actuator button or alternate button can be selected.) Up to nine groups can be set in one screen (N3 = 1 to 9). When 0 is set, the selector switch function is disabled, and each button operates as a single alternate button.

N4: Set whether to use each button. (Use = 1, Not use = 0) A1: Set the address of a signal for turning on/off each lamp and the

address of the output signal of each button.


- 77 -

7.4 MANUAL OPERATION SCREEN (COMMON SPECIFICATIONS FOR PAGE 1 AND PAGE 2)

7.4.1 Screen Configuration

The manual operation screen consists of a lamp area, manual button area, and numeric display area. The lamp area has 24 lamps (LMP01 to LMP24), and the manual button area has 28 manual button (BTN01 to BTN28). Each of the lamp area and manual button area can be switched between two screens. Page 1 of the numeric display area can display up to four items of numeric data such as a tool number and cycle time, and up to two pages can be displayed by setting. The numeric display area can also display a signal monitor area used to monitor the states of I/O signals. You can switch between the pages of each area by using the three page switch buttons (lamp switch button, button switch button, and number switch button).

LMP01 LMP02 LMP03 LMP04 LMP05 LMP06 LMP07 Lamp

Page

LMP08 LMP09 LMP10 LMP11 LMP12 LMP13 LMP14 Button

Page

LMP15 LMP16 LMP17 LMP18 LMP19 Number

Page

LMP20 LMP21 LMP22 LMP23 LMP24





The two subscreens displayed in the numeric display area are detailed below.

KOGU1 NUM01 KOGU2 NUM02 KOGU3 NUM03 KOGU4 NUM04 Manual

Operation

FaultDisplay

Tool Exchang

NC Operatio

1/3


- 78 -

7.4.1.1 Numeric display subscreen The numeric display subscreen can display four types of numeric data and their names. The upper three lines can display arbitrary numeric data held in the PMC. PMC data to be displayed can be set in the left-hand table of [Manual operation screen (3/3) Parameter setting for numeric display]. The bottom line can display an arbitrary item of data displayed on the cycle time measurement screen. A desired item of data can be set in the left-hand table of [Manual operation screen (3/3) Parameter setting for numeric display]. Up to two pages of numeric display can be set for display. In this case, the number switch button can be used to switch between the pages.

Name Numericvalue

Name Numericvalue

Name Numericvalue

Name Cycle time value

7.4.1.2 Signal monitor subscreen

The signal monitor subscreen can display the states (8 bits) of up to four arbitrary PMC addresses at the same time. By touching the alphabet setting field and numeric setting field of the address setting section, the alphabet input keys and numeric input keys pop up, respectively. With these keys, enter a PMC address to be displayed. When a PMC address is set, the state (one byte) of the set address is displayed by 0s and 1s.

M 01001001

N 00000000

R 00110010

R 11100000

0123

0081

0100

0200

Alphabet settingfield

Numericsetting field

State displayfield


- 79 -

7.4.2 Lamp and Manual Button Setting - Setting Tables (1/3, 2/3) Each of the lamp area setting table and manual button area setting table has setting lines for two pages. Whether to use page 2 can be specified using the column of Use 2nd page on the right side of page 3/3.

The method of lamp and button setting is the same as for the fault display screen. Up to four lines can be used to specify a button name on the manual operation screen.


- 80 -

7.4.3 Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (3/3) In the table below, set the addresses of data and item names to be displayed in the numeric display area. The table has setting lines for two pages. Whether to use page 2 of the numeric display area can be specified using the NUM_SEL line in the right-hand table. In the column of Button name in the right-hand table, set a character string to be displayed on the page switch button.

A2 : Set the address (2 bytes) of a numeric value to be

displayed. N1 : Set the number of decimal places of each numeric value.

A number from 0 to 3 can be specified. When 0 is specified, the decimal point is not displayed. Set 1 at all times for cycle time display (KOGU4 of items 4 and 8).

S14, S8_1 : Character string for describing each numeric value N2 : Set whether to use numeric display. (Use=1, Not use=0) N4 : By using an item number of the cycle time measurement

screen, specify cycle time data to be displayed in KOGU4. If 1 is specified here, for example, the latest cycle time in the item of Motion1 on the cycle time measurement screen is displayed. A cycle time value is displayed in 1/10 seconds. So, for this item, set 1 as the number of decimal places.

When a cycle time monitor screen is created, Motion1 only is available. So, set 1 here.

N3_1 : Set whether to use page 2 of the lamp display area. (Use = 1, Not use = 0)

N3_2 : Set whether to use page 2 of the manual button area. (Use = 1, Not use = 0)

N3_3 : Set whether to use page 2 of the numeric display area. (Use = 1, Not use = 0)

S8_2 : Character string to be displayed on a page switch button N5 : Set whether to use signal monitor display. (Use = 1, Not

use = 0)


- 81 -

7.5 NC OPERATION SCREEN

7.5.1 Screen Configuration The NC operation screen is used to operate the CNC. The NC operation screen consists of a lamp area (LMP01 to LMP12) for displaying NC states, a button area (BTN01 to BTN28) for operating the NC, and a sub-window where the alarm display subscreen, axis coordinate display subscreen, or program check subscreen can be displayed by switching. With FPAssist Version 5.30 and later, a new function has been added to allow the indications of a lamp area from LMP05 to LMP08 and a button area from BTN12 to BTN15 to be changed using the SELECT AXIS button displayed in the upper part of the menu button area. With this function, lamps near the reference position for up to eight axes and axis selection buttons for handle and jog operations can be provided.

LMP01 LMP02 LMP03 LMP04 Position

NEAR REFERENCE POSITION SELECTAXIS

LMP05 LMP06 LMP07 LMP08

LMP09 LMP10 LMP11 LMP12

MODE SCAILNG

BTN01 BTN02 BTN03 BTN07


HANDLE/JOG



For display in the sub-window in the upper-right area of the screen above, you can select one of the three subscreens below.

POSAXIS

MSG01

MSG02

BTN21 BTN22

BTN23 BTN24

BTN25 BTN26

BTN27 BTN28

BTN09

BTN10

BTN11

BTN20

ManualSlide

NC Operation

ATC Operation

TOOLCounter

2/3


- 82 -

7.5.1.1 Alarm display subscreen If a CNC alarm is issued, the Alarm/Error code field displays an alarm number, and the ALARM/FAULT MESSAGE field displays an alarm message set in the table of the [NC operation screen (4/4) Parameter settings for fault messages] page. An alarm number is read from a PMC address set in the Alarm code top address parameter of the [NC operation screen (3/4) Parameter settings for axis state display] page. If an alarm (No. 0300 to No. 0519) related to a controlled axis is issued, an axis name is also displayed after the alarm number. An axis name set in the Path/Axis No./Name correspondence table of the [NC operation screen (3/4) Parameter settings for axis state display] page is displayed. This screen is always displayed.

NC fault.

ALARM/FAULT

MESSAGE

FANUC 18iNC type

Alarm/Error code

ALARM/Error message

7.5.1.2 Axis coordinate display subscreen The coordinate value and tolerance situation of a selected axis are displayed. A type of axis is selected from the table below according to the signals (2 bits) at an address set in the Axis select address parameter of the [NC operation screen (3/4) Parameter settings for axis state display] page. A character string to be displayed in the Name field is to be set in the Axis No./Name correspondence table of the same page. An axis coordinate value is read from a PMC address set in the Axis position address parameter. In the fields of Tolerance situation field and Message of tolerance situation, character strings set in the Tolerance status table are displayed according to the state of the signal (3 bits) at the PMC address set in the Tolerance status signal address parameter. This subscreen displays information for path 1 when the signal at the address set in the Path selection signal address parameter is 0, and this subscreen displays information for path 2 when the signal at the address set in the Path selection signal address parameter is 1. This subscreen is not used with the Power Mate i-LNA.

AXS2 AXS1 Selected axis 0 0 Axis 1 0 1 Axis 2 1 0 Axis 3 1 1 Axis 4


- 83 -

Name Position

Tolerance situation

Massage of tolerance situation

7.5.1.3 Program check subscreen The program check subscreen displays the main program number (O No. 1), subprogram number (O No. 2), sequence number (N No.) currently being executed, the axis coordinates of 4 to 8 axes, feedrate command, NC state, and part (3 lines) of the program currently being executed. The axis coordinate display field displays one of three patterns: the 4-axis display pattern, 6-axis display pattern, and 8-axis display pattern. An appropriate display pattern is selected automatically according to the number of axes set in the Coordinate/Axis No. correspondence table of the [NC operation screen (3/4) Parameter settings for axis state display] page. The program display field displays the program currently being executed in line 1, and displays a second program and third program to be displayed in line 2 and 3, respectively. One line can display up to 26 characters. Those characters that exceed this limit are not displayed on the screen. A coordinate value to be displayed in the axis coordinate display field can be selected from the eight types of data listed in the table below. A selection can be made using signals input at the addresses indicated in the table. When no signal is input, the absolute coordinate (program coordinate) is selected. With E3.02 and later, the CHNG POS button is provided in the upper-right corner of the program check subscreen. This button also enables you to switch among the types of coordinate values. Which switching method is used depends on the setting of Change Position added to the [NC operation screen (3/4) Parameter settings for axis state display] page. If switching based on the CHNG POS button is selected, the coordinate data displayed switches sequentially among the five types of coordinate data indicated in the table each time you press the button. In the upper-left corner of the program check subscreen, the type of coordinate data currently selected is displayed.

Feedrate F

Program being executed (3 lines)

Axis coordinate

4 to 8 axes

O No. 1O No. 2N No.

Type of coordinate CHNGPOS.

Axis

name

NC statedisplay


- 84 -

Selection based on signals

Address (N0131) No.

#7 #6 #5 #4

Selection based on the CHNG POS

button

Type of data displayed

1 0 0 0 0 O Absolute coordinate (program coordinate)

2 0 0 0 1 O Machine coordinate 3 0 0 1 0 O Relative coordinate

4 0 0 1 1 O Remaining amount of movement

5 0 1 0 0 Skip position 6 0 1 0 1 Servo delay amount

7 0 1 1 0 Acceleration/deceleration delay amount

8 0 1 1 1 O Slide coordinate


- 85 -

7.5.2 Lamp Area and Button Area Setting - Setting Tables (1/4, 2/4)

The method of lamp and button setting is the same as for the fault display screen. Up to two lines can be displayed on each of the buttons BTN01 to BTN20. Up to three lines can be displayed on each of the buttons BTN21 to BTN28. With FPAssist Version 5.30 and later, lamp indications can be changed between the lamps set for Nos. 5 to 8 (LMP05 to LMP08) and the lamps set for Nos. 2-5 to 2-8. This can increase the origin lamps for up to eight axes. N2 : Set 1 to add the origin lamp extension screen. Set 0 if the

addition of the screen is unnecessary. S8_1 : When N2 is set to 1, the axis selection button appears in the

upper part of the menu button area. A name to be displayed on the axis selection button can be specified with two lines each consisting of eight characters (two lines, each consisting of up to nine characters). The default is "SELECT/AXIS".

[NC operation screen(1/4) Parameter settings for lamps.]

5Screen name:

-1

0OK

No Lamp name Name Cha. Cha. Lamp colorPMC addresrow scale ON OFF Lamp ON

1 LMP01 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 A12 LMP02 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 A13 LMP03 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 A14 LMP04 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 A15 LMP05 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 A16 LMP06 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 A17 LMP07 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 A18 LMP08 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 A19 LMP09 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 A110 LMP10 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 A111 LMP11 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 A112 LMP12 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 A1

ADDITIONAL REFERENCE POS LAMPS (0:No, 1:Add) N2AXIS SELECTION PAGE SWITCHING BUTTON CAPTION S8_1 S8_1

2-5 LMP05 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 A12-6 LMP06 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 A12-7 LMP07 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 A12-8 LMP08 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 A1

← →CHECK

[NC operation screen(2/4) Parameter settings for buttons.]Screen name: 0

-1OK

No Btn name Name Cha. Cha. Lamp color Frame color Type Group Mode PMC addressrow scale ON OFF ON OFF No Lamp Blink Lamp ON Btn Output

1 BTN01 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2 N3 N4 A1 A1 A12 BTN02 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2 N3 N4 A1 A1 A13 BTN03 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2 N3 N4 A1 A1 A14 BTN04 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2 N3 N4 A1 A1 A15 BTN05 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2 N3 N4 A1 A1 A16 BTN06 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2 N3 N4 A1 A1 A17 BTN07 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2 N3 N4 A1 A1 A18 BTN08 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2 N3 N4 A1 A1 A1: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :

26 BTN26 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2 N3 N4 A1 A1 A127 BTN27 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2 N3 N4 A1 A1 A128 BTN28 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2 N3 N4 A1 A1 A1

ADDITIONAL AXIS SELECTION BUTTONS (0:No, 1:A N52-12 BTN12 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2 N3 N4 A1 A1 A12-13 BTN13 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2 N3 N4 A1 A1 A12-14 BTN14 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2 N3 N4 A1 A1 A12-15 BTN15 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 B1 C1 C1 C1 C1 N2 N3 N4 A1 A1 A1

← →CHECK


- 86 -

With FPAssist Version 5.30 and later, like the lamp area, button indications can be changed between the buttons set for Nos.12 to 15 (BTN12 to BTN15) and the buttons set for Nos. 2-12 to 2-15. This can increase the axis selection buttons for up to eight axes. N5 : Set 1 to add the axis selection button extension screen. Set 0 if

the addition of the screen is unnecessary. The caption of the axis selection switch button is applicable to the setting of the button area as well.

CAUTION

With FPAssist Version 5.30 or later, a group of the buttons for Nos. 12 to 15 (BTN12 to BTN15) is controlled independently of the other button groups because these buttons are located on a different child screen from the other buttons. It is thus assumed that the group of the buttons for Nos. 12 to 15 (BTN12 to BTN15) is on one screen, while a group of the buttons for Nos. 1 to 11 and Nos. 16 to 28 as well as a group of the buttons for Nos. 2-12 to 2-15 are on another screen. Exclusive control is therefore not performed even if the same group number is set for the three button groups. Be careful when using the buttons as actuator buttons or alternate buttons. For example, if the same group number is set for the group of the buttons for Nos. 12 to 15 (BTN12 to BTN15) and the group of the buttons for Nos. 21 to 28 (BTN21 to BTN28), the buttons for Nos. 12 to 15 and the buttons for Nos. 21 to 28 function as selector switches in different groups, and cannot function as selector switches in one group.


- 87 -

7.5.3 Path Selection Signal Setting - Setting Table (3/4) In the setting table (3/4), set the addresses of an alarm code, tolerance status code, axis coordinate value, and axis selection signal. The addresses based on the milling machine specification are set as the defaults. So, when using a lathe, modify the defaults accordingly. Moreover, set a path selection signal, axis names, and model name.

Do not modify the settings in this table.

Set axis names to be displayed on the axis coordinate display subscreen and Alarm/Error code field.

Set the axis namecorresponding to a CNC controlled axislist.

Set CNC controlled axis numbers and paths displayed at coordinate display positions on the program check screen.

A1_1 : Set the start address (least significant bit) of an alarm code

(ERR11 to ERR68) output from each path of the CNC. (The default addresses based on the milling machine specification are set. Path 1: M0016.0, Path 2: M0078.0)

A1_2 : Set the start address of a tolerance status signal (YA1 to YA3) output from each path of the CNC. (The default addresses based on the milling machine specification are set. Path 1: M0021.5, Path 2: M0083.5)

A2 : Set the start address of a coordinate value (MN0 to MN31) output from each path of the CNC. (The default addresses based on the milling machine specification are set. Path 1: M0022, Path 2: M0084)

A1_3 : Set the start address of an axis selection signal (AXS1, AXS2) input to each path of the CNC. (The default addresses based on the milling machine specification are set. Path 1: N0015.1, Path 2: N0055.1)


- 88 -

A1_4 : Set the address of the path selection signal used to choose whether to display path 1 information or path 2 information. Path 1 is selected when the path selection signal is set to 0. Path 2 is selected when the path selection signal is set to 1.

N1 : Set whether to enable or disable the axis coordinate display subscreen and program check subscreen. (Disable both screens = 0, Enable the axis coordinate display subscreen = 1, Enable the program check subscreen = 2, Enable the axis coordinate display subscreen and program check subscreen = 3) (When using the Power Mate i-LNA, set 0 or 2.)

N2 : Set whether to use the button provided on the program check subscreen (N2 = 0) or use the signals input to addresses N131#7 to #4 (N2 = 1) when selecting a type of coordinate data to be displayed on the axis coordinate display field of the program check subscreen. (This function is available with E3.02 and later.)

N3 : Set a CNC controlled axis number from 1 to 8 to specify which CNC controlled axis coordinate to be displayed in the axis coordinate display position on a program check subscreen. Set 0 for those axis numbers that need not be displayed. Depending on up to which line of the axis coordinate setting table has axis numbers set, a program check subscreen for 4 axes, 6 axes, or 8 axes is automatically selected. This input item is valid, independently of the second NC operation screen. (This function is available with E3.02 and later).

N4 : In the case of two-path control, specify the path number corresponding to a CNC controlled axis number set in N3. (1: Path 1, 2: Path 2, 0: Follows the path selection signal (A1_4)) This input item is valid, independently of the second NC operation screen. (This function is available with E3.02 and later).

S2 : Set the axis name corresponding to a CNC controlled axis list. This setting is used for axis name display in the axis coordinate display field on the program check subscreen. (2 half-size characters max.) If this input item consists of a blank or space, the axis name set in the NC parameter is used. This function is available with E3.02.)

S6 : Set an axis name to be displayed in the axis name field of the axis coordinate display subscreen or in the Alarm/Error code display field of the alarm display subscreen. (Set the axis name of an NC axis.)

S6_1 : Set an axis name to be displayed in the Alarm/Error code display field of the alarm display subscreen. (Set the axis name of an indexing axis. Axes 7 and 8 are not used.)

S9 : Enter an NC model name. Choose between FANUC 18i and FANUC PMi.


- 89 -

CAUTION When two NC operation screens are used, set the

same data except for the setting items of N3 and N4.

An example of program check subscreen display when the following axis selection setting is made for coordinate display on the program check screen is given below:

Example of coordinate display on the program check subscreen

A 00000.000 B 00000.111 C 00010.000 U 00020.222 V 00003.333 W 00040.444

← The coordinate of the 4th axis of path 1 is displayed, and the name "A" is displayed because the setting table indicates "A" for the 4th axis of the specified path. Similarly, the coordinates and axis names of other specified axes are displayed.

← As the coordinate of the 6th axis, the 6th axis of path 2 is specified. So, the coordinate of the 6th axis of path 2 and the axis name "W" are displayed.

coordinat Axis No. Path Display name Path 1 Path 21 4 1 Axis 1 X1 X22 5 1 Axis 2 Y1 Y23 6 1 Axis 3 Z1 Z24 4 2 Axis 4 A U5 5 2 Axis 5 B V6 6 2 Axis 6 C W7 Axis 78 Axis 8


- 90 -

7.5.4 Fault Message Setting - Setting Table (4/4) In the setting table (4/4), the alarm messages corresponding to alarm numbers are already set. Do not modify the settings. If an alarm is issued from the CNC, FANUC PICTURE references the setting table (4/4) and reads the alarm message corresponding to the alarm number from the column of Alarm type, then displays the message in the Alarm/Error code display field of the alarm display subscreen.

NOTE When a 2-path system is employed, and two NC

operation screens are created for each path, two work sheets are created for each path. The settings of 3/4 and 4/4 of these two sheets must be the same. In ladder processing, ensure that the path select signal is output to select the desired path according to Screen selected address on [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration].

[NC operation screen(4/4) Parameter settings for fault messages.]Screen name:

-1OK

No Alarm code Axis Alarm typeFrom To suffix

1 000 0255 0 P/S ALARM (1)2 0260 0260 0 WAITING FOR|FIN SIGNAL3 0261 0261 0 MOTION COMMAND4 0262 0262 0 DWELL5 0263 0263 0 IN-POSITION|CHECK6 0264 0264 0 FEEDRATE|OVERRIDE 0%7 0265 0265 0 INTERLOCK/|START-LOCK8 0266 0266 0 SPINDLE SPEED|ARRIVAL CHECK9 0273 0273 0 JOG FEEDRATE|OVERRIDE 0%10 0274 0274 0 WAITING FOR|RESET, ESP, RRW OFF11 0275 0275 0 EXTERNAL PROGRAM|NUMBER SEARCH12 0280 0280 0 HALT BY:|EMERGENCY STOP ON13 0281 0281 0 HALT BY:|NC RESET ON14 0282 0282 0 HALT BY:|MDI RESET ON15 0284 0284 0 HALT BY:|SERVO ALARM16 0285 0285 0 HALT BY:FEED HOLD|*SP=0 or MODE change17 0286 0286 0 HALT BY:|SINGLE BLOCK18 0290 0290 0 HALT BY:FEED HOLD|ORE turned off19 0291 0291 0 HALT BY:FEED HOLD|PNSC,PN1-40C changed20 0300 0319 1 ABSOLUTE PULSE|CODER ALARM21 0350 0399 1 SERIAL PULSE|CODER ALARM22 0400 0499 1 SERVO ALARM23 0500 0519 1 OVER TRAVEL ALARM24 0700 0709 0 OVERHEAT ALARM25 0740 0748 0 RIGID TAPPING|ALARM26 0749 0762 0 SPINDLE ALARM27 0800 0840 0 MACHINE ALARM28 5000 5050 0 P/S ALARM (2)29 5051 5057 0 SERIAL INTERFACE|ALARM30 5058 6099 0 P/S ALARM (3)

← →CHECK


- 91 -

7.6 TOOL EXCHANGE COUNTER 1 SCREEN

7.6.1 Screen Configuration The tool exchange counter 1 screen consists of three counter area pages each consisting of six counters (CNT01 to CNT06), three button area pages each consisting of eighteen operation buttons (BTN01 to BTN18), a reset button, and page switch button. When a value is entered in the counter area, a ten-key pad for numeric input appears at the center of the screen. Usually, no ten-key pad is displayed on the screen. The tool exchange counter 1 screen is used to manage tool life.

NAME PRELIM. WARNING STOP COUNT OPERATION BUTTON

CNT01 BTN01 BTN02 BTN03






RESET

ManualOperation

FaultDisplay

RunningStatus

Tool Exchang

1/3


- 92 -

7.6.1.1 Setting and display of pre-forecast, forecast, and stop values When you press a button in the PRELIM, WARNING, or STOP column, a ten-key pad appears at the center over the current screen. The PREV. box of the ten-key pad displays the value set with the touched button. When you enter a numeric value by touching numeric keys, the entered value appears in the INPUT box. When you touch the SET key, the ten-key pad disappears, and the numeric value displayed in the INPUT box is set and displayed on the button from which the ten-key pad was called. When you touch the CLOSE button, the entered value is canceled (the previous value is preserved), and the ten-key pad disappears. When you touch the CLR button, the value displayed in the INPUT box is cleared. The ten-key pad name field displays the ten-key pad name corresponding to a button set in the [Tool exchange counter screen (2/3) Parameter settings for counter signal] sheet. Range of values that can be set on each counter is 0 to 999999 (six digits).

NAME TOOL1 PRE-LIMIT

PREV. 100

INPUT 25

1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 0

CLR CLOSE SET

PREV. box

INPUT box

Ten-key pad name

Numeric keys

7.6.1.2 Measurement of the current value counter

In the [Tool exchange counter screen (1/3) Parameter settings for counters] sheet, set a count signal address for each tool. Each time a signal is input at the specified address, the current value is incremented by one. The current value is incremented on the rising edge of the signal. A count signal must have a width of 500 ms or more.

Count signal

> 500 ms

Incremented here


- 93 -

7.6.1.3 Display of tool exchange information When the current value of a counter reaches or exceeds the pre-forecast or forecast value, the corresponding button is turned on in orange. When the current value of a counter reaches or exceeds the stop value, the corresponding STOP button is turned on in red. At this time, a signal (1) is output to the count-up signal address set for the button. The count-up signal continues to be output while the current value of the counter is equal to or greater than the value set for the button. If 0 is set for all or any of the pre-forecast, forecast, and stop values, the button color does not change and the count-up signal is not output for the item(s) where 0 is set. A STOP button is also turned on in red when a signal is input to the stop turn-on address set for the STOP button. In this case, however, the count-up signal is not output. The conventional specification specifies that even if 0 is set for all of the pre-forecast, forecast, and stop values, the current value counter performs count operation when the count signal is input. With E3.02 and later, you can choose whether to perform current value count operation or not in such a case.

7.6.1.4 Resetting of a current value counter When you touch the name button of a tool in the name column, the button is turned on in orange, indicating that the button is selected. The buttons in the name column are selector switches, so that only one button can be selected at a time. If another button is selected, the selection of the previous button is released. When you touch the selected button again, the button returns to the nonselected state. If you touch the reset button when a name button is selected, the current value of the selected tool is reset to 0. At this time, a 500-ms wide pulse signal (1) is output to the reset notification address set for the selected tool. The current value of a tool can also be reset (on a rising edge) by inputting a signal to the reset request address set for the tool. The same pulse signal is output to the reset notification address in this case as well. The reset request signal must have a width of 500 ms or more.

Reset request signal

> 500 ms

Reset here


- 94 -

7.6.2 Counter Setting - Setting Table (1/3) In the setting table (1/3), set the tool names to be displayed on the counter selection buttons (CNT01 to CNT06), and the addresses of a count signal, reset signal, and reset notification signal for each tool.

S8 : Set a character string to be displayed on a counter selection

button (left side). (8 half-size characters (recommended), 9 half-size characters max.)

N1 : Number of lines of a character string above. (3 lines max.) A1_1 : Set the address of a count signal for each tool. On a rising

edge of a count signal, the tool exchange counter is incremented by one.

A1_2 : Set the address of a signal for resetting a tool exchange counter. While a signal is ON, the counter is reset.

A1_3 : Set the address of a signal for notifying the PMC of a reset operation. When a counter is reset by the reset button on the screen or by a signal from the PMC, a reset notification signal is output to the address set for the reset counter. A reset notification signal is output as a pulse signal with a width of about 500 ms.

N2 : Set whether to use a counter. (Use = 1, Not use = 0) N3 : Set the number of tool exchange counter screens (1 to 3). N4 : Select a current value counter operation to be performed if 0 is

set for all of the pre-forecast, forecast, and stop values. In the case where N4 = 0 is specified, current value counter operation is performed when a count signal is input although 0 is set for all of the pre-forecast, forecast, and stop values. In the case where N4 = 1 is specified, current value counter operation is not performed if 0 is set for all of the pre-forecast, forecast, and stop values. (This function is available with E3.02 and later.)


- 95 -

7.6.3 Ten-Key Pad Setting - Setting Table (2/3) In the setting table (2/3), set a character string to be displayed in the ten-key pad name field, and the addresses of count-up signals for pre-forecast, forecast, and stop values. With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, the current value can be set using the ten-key pad. Usually, an interlock signal is provided to disable the current value from being modified.

S20 : Set a character string (not longer than 20 half-size characters)

to be displayed on a ten-key pad for pre-forecast, forecast, or stop value setting. Set a ten-key pad name for each counter used. Do not include any space characters in a ten-key pad name. (With E2.00 and later, a character string including space characters can also be set.)

With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, set a ten-key pad name for current value modification.

A1_1 : Set the address of a count-up signal to be output when the value of a counter reaches or exceeds a pre-forecast, forecast, or stop value.

A1_2 : Set the address of a signal for turning on a STOP button. In cases other than count-up operation, a STOP button can be turned on by inputting this signal.

A1_3 : With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, set the address of an interlock signal for the ten-key pad for current value modification. To be compatible with the old specifications that do not allow current value modification, R9091.1 (which is on at all times with the PMC) is set by default. Moreover, when a blank is set, R9091.1 is used as an interlock signal.

[Tool exchange counter screen(2/3) Parameter settings for counter signal]Screen name:

-1OK Inter-rock signal address A1_3

No Pg Part name Pre forecast value Forecast value Stop value Current valueTen-key title Full count Ten-key title Full count Ten-key title Full count Lamp ON Ten-key title

1 CNT01 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 2 CNT02 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 3 1 CNT03 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 4 CNT04 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 5 CNT05 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 6 CNT06 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 7 CNT01 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 8 CNT02 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 9 2 CNT03 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 10 CNT04 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 11 CNT05 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 12 CNT06 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 13 CNT01 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 14 CNT02 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 15 3 CNT03 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 16 CNT04 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 17 CNT05 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 18 CNT06 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20

← →CHECK


- 96 -

7.6.4 Operation Button Setting - Setting Table (3/3) The method of button setting is the same as for the fault display screen. Note, however, that a name not longer than three lines can be displayed on a button.


- 97 -

7.7 TOOL EXCHANGE COUNTER 2 SCREEN The tool exchange counter 2 screen is the same as the tool exchange counter 1 screen except that all operation buttons are deleted and some counters are added. The tool exchange counters operate in the same way as for the tool exchange counter 1 screen. However, the range of values that can be set and displayed on each counter is 0 to 99999 (five digits). The tool exchange counter 1 screen and the tool exchange counter 2 screen cannot be used at the same time. Use one of the two screens at a time.

NAME PRELIM WARN. STOP COUNT PRELIM WARN. STOP COUNT

CNT01

CNT09

CNT02

CNT10

CNT03

CNT11

CNT04

CNT12

CNT05

CNT13

CNT06

CNT14

CNT07

CNT15

CNT08

CNT16

RESET

ManualOperation

FaultDisplay

RunningStatus

Tool Exchange

1/3


- 98 -

The method of setting the table above is the same as for the tool exchange counter 1 screen. A button name consisting of up to two lines can be specified for the buttons CNT01 to CTN16.

The method of setting the table above is the same as for the tool exchange counter 1 screen.

← CHECK →

[Tool exchange counter 2 screen(2/2) Parameter settings for Ten-key]Screen name:

1NEED Inter-rock signal address A1_3

No Pg Part name Pre forecast value Forecast value Stop value Current valueTen-key title Full count Ten-key title Full count Ten-key title Full count Lamp ON Ten-key title

1 CNT01 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 2 CNT02 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 3 CNT03 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 4 1 CNT04 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 : : : : : : : : : :

14 CNT14 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 15 CNT15 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 16 CNT16 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 17 CNT01 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 18 CNT02 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 19 CNT03 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 20 2 CNT04 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 : : : : : : : : : :

30 CNT14 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 31 CNT15 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 32 CNT16 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 33 CNT01 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 34 CNT02 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 35 CNT03 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 36 3 CNT04 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 : : : : : : : : : :

46 CNT14 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 47 CNT15 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20 48 CNT16 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 S20


- 99 -

7.8 TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER SCREEN

7.8.1 Screen Configuration The tool compensation counter screen consists of four counter area pages each consisting of five counters (OFS01 to OFS05), four button area pages each consisting of five operation buttons (BTN01 to BTN05), a reset button, and page switch button. When a value is entered in the counter area, a ten-key pad for numeric input appears at the center of the screen. The tool compensation counter screen is used to manage tool compensation values. With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, when the Series 18i-LNB is used, the number of counters can be increased up to 60 counters (12 screens). Even when two-path control is used, the total number of tools of the two paths is 60.

NAME LIMIT CURRENT INCRMNT INC./DEC OP.BUTTN

OFS01

+

__

BTN01

OFS02

+

__

BTN02

OFS03

+

__

BTN03

OFS04

+

__

BTN04

OFS05

+

__

BTN05

RESET

MANULSLIDE

NC OPRTN

ACT OPRTN

OffsetCounter

2/3


- 100 -

7.8.1.1 Setting and display of limit values When you press a button in the LIMIT column, a ten-key pad appears at the center over the current screen. The PREV. box of the ten-key pad displays the value set with the touched button. When you enter a numeric value by touching numeric keys, the entered value appears in the INPUT box. When you touch the SET key, the ten-key pad disappears, and the numeric value displayed in the INPUT box is set and displayed on the button from which the ten-key pad was called. When you touch the CLOSE button, the entered value is canceled (the previous value is preserved), and the ten-key pad disappears. When you touch the CLR key, the value displayed in the INPUT box is cleared. The ten-key pad name field displays the ten-key pad name corresponding to a button set in the [Tool compensation counter screen (1/3) Parameter settings for counters] sheet.

NAME T1 OFFSET X LIMT

PREV. 100

INPUT 25

1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 0

CLR CLOSE SET

PREV. box

INPUT box

Ten-key pad name

Numeric keys

NOTE Use NC parameters to set incremental values.

7.8.1.2 Compensation operation

When you touch a + button in the INC/DEC column, an incremental value is added to the current value of the corresponding tool. If the current value has reached a limit value or greater, touching the + button does not increment the current value (in the case of the 18i-LNA). When you touch a - button in the INC/DEC column, an incremental value is subtracted from the current value of the corresponding tool. When the current value of a tool reaches a set limit value or greater, the corresponding LIMIT button is turned on in red. At this time, a signal (1) is output to the count-up signal address set for the tool. The count-up signal continues to be output while the current value is equal to or greater than the limit value. If 0 is set for a limit value, the count-up signal is not output. Moreover, the color of the LIMIT button does not change. If a limit value is changed to 0 while the count-up signal is output, the count-up signal is set to 0, and the red color of the LIMIT button disappears. (This function is available with E3.02 and later.)


- 101 -

7.8.1.3 Display and resetting of a current value When you touch the name button of a tool in the name column, the button is turned on in orange, indicating that the button is selected. The buttons in the name column are selector switches, so that only one button can be selected at a time. If another button is selected, the selection of the previous button is released. When you touch the selected button again, the button returns to the nonselected state. If you touch the reset button while a name button is selected, the current value of the selected tool is reset to 0.

7.8.1.4 Compensation processing With the 18i-LNA, incremental offset operations such as incremental value addition/subtraction, offset value clearing, and determination of whether a limit value is reached are processed using CNC functions. Operations on the operator's panel screen are converted to a sequence of the offset-related signals of the CNC (INC1 to INC6, +INC, -INC, FINC, OFS0, OMAX), which is then output. So, by assigning CNC input/output addresses (on the M-NET interface) to these signals, compensation operations can be processed only between the operator's panel and CNC. If compensation processing needs to be controlled from the PMC, do not directly connect offset-related signals transferred to and from the operator's panel with the CNC, but ensure that those signals are once received and processed by the PMC then are returned to the CNC. In the case of the Power Mate i-LNA, ensure that offset-related signals transferred to and from the operator's panel are once received by the PMC, then compensation value I/O input or halt compensation value I/O input is used. For PMC processing, see the ladder diagram of Appendix B. If a counter operation such as touching a + button, - button, or the reset button on the screen, the screen display cannot be switched from the tool compensation counter screen to another screen and is locked until the offset completion signal or offset clear completion signal is received. (With FANUC PICTURE of E2.00 and later, the screen is not locked even in such a case.) To prevent such a situation from occurring, ensure that the +/- INC signal output from the screen is blocked if a compensation operation is performed manually on the screen while a compensation operation is performed on the PMC. In addition, ensure that PMC ladder processing is performed to return the +/-INC signal as the offset completion signal or offset clear completion signal to the screen.


- 102 -

7.8.1.5 When two paths are used When the NC is based on the 2-path control specification, this screen is used to control the tool compensation values of both path 1 and path 2. So, this screen allows the setting of up to 4 pages, that is, up to 20 counters. The counter name setting table has a column for specifying to which path a tool belongs. The counter signal setting table allows you to set the addresses of counter operation signals for each of path 1 and path 2.

7.8.1.6 Interlock (available with E3.02 and later) With the interlock signal, manual operation of the tool compensation counter screen can be disabled. While the interlock signal is set to 1, the +/- buttons and the reset button are disabled. Set the interlock signal in the interlock signal address field of [Tool compensation counter screen (2/3) Parameter settings for counter signals].


- 103 -

7.8.2 Setting of Counter Names and So Forth - Setting Table (1/3) In the setting table (1/3), set tool names to be displayed on the tool selection buttons (OFS01 to OFS05), a character string to be displayed in the ten-key pad name field, count-up signal addresses, and so forth. With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, page 5 and up can be set when the Series 18i-LNB is used.

S8 : Set a character string to be displayed on a tool selection button

(left side). (8 half-size characters (recommended), 9 half-size characters max.)

N1 : Set the number of lines of a character string above. (4 lines max.)

S20 : Set a character string to be displayed on a ten-key pad called to set a limit value. (20 half-size characters max.) Set a ten-key pad name for each compensation counter limit value used. Do not include any space characters in a ten-key pad name. With E2.00 and later, a character string including space characters can also be set.

A1 : Set the address of a count-up signal to be output when the value of a tool compensation counter reaches or exceeds a limit value.

N2 : Specify to which path a tool belongs. (Path 1 = 1, Path 2 = 2) Arrange tools for path 1 and tools for path 2 in this order. Ensure that tools of path 1 and tools of path 2 are not mixed with each other.

N3 : Set whether to use a tool counter. (Use = 1, Not use = 0) N4 : Set the number of tool compensation counter screens (1 to 4). With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, a number from 1 to 12

can be set when the Series 18i-LNB is used.

[Tool compensation counter screen(1/3) Parameter settings for counters]12 Screen name: TOOLOFS

-1 No. of pages N40 OKNo Pg Part name Name Cha. Ten-key title Full count output Path Mode

row Limit value address1 OFS01 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N32 OFS02 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N30 1 OFS03 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N34 OFS04 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N35 OFS05 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N36 OFS01 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N37 OFS02 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N38 2 OFS03 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N39 OFS04 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N3

10 OFS05 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N311 OFS01 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N312 OFS02 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N313 3 OFS03 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N314 OFS04 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N315 OFS05 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N316 OFS01 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N317 OFS02 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N318 4 OFS03 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N319 OFS04 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N320 OFS05 S8 S8 S8 S8 N1 S20 A1 N2 N3

← → CHECK

↓


- 104 -

7.8.3 Counter Signal Setting - Setting Table (2/3) In the setting table (2/3), set the addresses of incremental-offset-related signals. The addresses based on the milling machine specification are set as the defaults. So, when using a lathe, modify the defaults accordingly.

A1_1 : The offset register selection signals (INC1 to INC6) are output

to a set address. (The default addresses based on the milling machine specification are set. Path 1: N0007.0, Path 2: N0047.0)

A1_2 : The incremental offset signal (+INC) is output to a set address. (The default addresses based on the milling machine specification are set. Path 1: N0007.6, Path 2: N0047.6)

A1_3 : The incremental offset signal (-INC) is output to a set address. (The default addresses based on the milling machine specification are set. Path 1: N0007.7, Path 2: N0047.7)

A1_4 : Set an address for referencing the offset completion signal (FINC). (The default addresses based on the milling machine specification are set. Path 1: M0007.4, Path 2: M0069.4)

A1_5 : Set an address for referencing the offset completion signal (OMAX). (The default addresses based on the milling machine specification are set. Path 1: M0007.5, Path 2: M0069.5)

A1_6 : Set an address for referencing the offset completion signal (OFS0). (The default addresses based on the milling machine specification are set. Path 1: M0007.6, Path 2: M0069.6)

N1 : Set the number of decimal places used when an offset value is displayed. Usually, set 3 to match the increment system of an NC offset value.

A1_7 : A selected offset incremental value (4 bytes) is output to a set address (for the Power Mate i-LNA). This item need not be set for the 18i-LNA.


- 105 -

NOTE When performing an incremental-offset-related

operation with a PMC ladder, change the addresses in the table above to PMC addresses and switch the operator's panel signals to PMC signals on the PMC for transfer to the CNC.

A1_8 : The signal of an address set here is used as the interlock signal.

(This function is available with E3.02 and later.)

7.8.4 Operation Button Setting - Setting Table (3/3)

With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, page 5 and up can be set when the Series 18i-LNB is used. The method of button setting is the same as for the fault display screen.


- 106 -

7.9 RUNNING DISPLAY SCREEN

7.9.1 Screen Configuration The running display screen consists of a lamp area, numeric display area, and running display area. The functions of the lamp area and numeric display area are the same as those of the manual operation screen. The running display area consists of 135 lamps used to display the running statuses of stations. The running statuses of up to 15 stations can be displayed.


Page


LMP15 LMP16 LMP17 LMP18 LMP19 Number Page


One setting table provides setting lines for two pages for each of the lamp area and numeric display area. Whether to use the second page can be specified in the column of Use 2nd page of the right-hand table of the setting table (2/3).

FlowDiagn.

CycleTime

RunningStatus

FaultDisplay

3/3

STATION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

L CONT.

COMPLETED

UNIT RUNNING

JIG UNCLAMP

LOADER RUN

JIG CLAMPED

UNIT RUNNING

COMPLETED

R CONT.

KOGU1 NUM01 KOGU2 NUM02 KOGU3 NUM03 KOGU4 NUM04


- 107 -

7.9.2 Lamp Area Setting - Setting Table (1/3)

The method of lamp setting is the same as for the fault display screen.

7.9.3 Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (2/3)

The method of numeric display setting is the same as for the manual operation screen.


- 108 -

7.9.4 Running Display Lamp Setting - Setting Table (3/3)

A1: Set the address of a signal for turning on a lamp.


- 109 -

7.10 RUNNING DISPLAY 2 SCREEN

7.10.1 Screen Configuration The running display 2 screen consists of a lamp area, numeric display area, and running display area. The functions of the lamp area and numeric display area are the same as those of the manual operation screen. The running display area consists of 240 lamps whose display colors can be set. The running display area is used to display the running statuses of stations. Two screens of the running display area can be displayed by switching. One screen can display the running statuses of up to 15 stations. Station names and running status names can be set freely.


Page

LMP08 LMP09 LMP10 LMP11 LMP12 LMP13 LMP14 Station



One setting table provides setting lines for two pages for each of the lamp area and numeric display area. Whether to use the second page can be specified in the column of Use 2nd page of the right-hand table of the setting table (2/3).

STATION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

FlowDiagn.

CycleTime

RunningStatus

FaultDisplay

3/3

KOGU1 NUM01 KOGU2 NUM02 KOGU3 NUM03 KOGU4 NUM04


- 110 -

7.10.2 Lamp Area Setting - Setting Table (1/3)

The method of lamp setting is the same as for the fault display screen.

7.10.3 Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (2/3) The method of numeric display setting is the same as for the manual operation screen, except that the setting item (LMP2_SEL) is added to the right-hand table. Specify whether to create the second page of the running display area.

N3_3 : Set whether to create the second page of the running display

area. (Use = 1, Not use = 0) S8_2 : Character string to be displayed on a page switch button


- 111 -

7.10.4 Operation Indicator Lamp Setting - Setting Table (3/3)

S14: Set the name of a running status to be displayed on the left side

of the running display area. Up to 16 items can be wet. The names set on the first page are displayed on the second page as well.

S3: Set a station name. Alphanumeric characters can be used. A1: Set the address of a signal for turning on an operation indicator

lamp. C1: Select the ON color and OFF color of an operation indicator

lamp.

W R G B O Y WB BL GL White Red Green Blue Orange Yellow Light blue Black Gray


- 112 -

7.11 FAULT COUNT SCREEN (USED FOR 36 AND 168 FAULT ITEMS)


The fault count screen is used to count and display the number of faults and the fault stop times for up to 168 fault items (408 fault items with E2.00 and later). The operator's panel contains registers for storing the fault stop time and the number of faults for five days (shifts). The values of today (shift), the previous day (shift), and one week (past five shifts) are displayed on the screen.

FAULT NUMBER LIST 1/3 TODAY BEFORE 1 WEEK NAME

NUMBER ACC.TIME NUMBER ACC.TIME NUMBER ACC.TIME

PAGE

FaultNumber

Cycle Time

RunningStatus

FaultMessage

3/3


- 113 -

7.11.1.1 Counting of the number of faults and measurement of stop time

The operator's panel performs processing necessary for display of this screen, such as the counting of the number of faults, measurement of fault occurrence time, storing of count values, and calculation of cumulative values. The time from the rising edge of a fault signal set in the [Parameter settings for Fault number list screen] sheet to the rising edge of the timer stop signal is measured as a fault occurrence time. Moreover, the number of rising edges of the fault signal is counted as the number of faults. If the fault signal rises again during a fault occurrence time, the occurrence of a fault is not assumed, but the additional rising edge is ignored. Each signal must have a pulse width of 500 ms or more.

Fault occurrence time

Fault signal

Timer stop signal

> 500ms

> 500msIgnored

The measured values displayed on the screen are stored on the SRAM of the CNC, and are preserved even when the power to the CNC is turned off. The stored measured values can be deleted by setting the alarm counter initialization signal set on the [Setting of the entire system (2/4) Setting of global screen] sheet to ON for the time set in Initialization signal on time of the same sheet or more. The stored measured values can also be deleted by all-clear operation of the SRAM of the CNC. Set the character strings displayed on the second line (TODAY, BEFORE, WEEK) of the title of this screen in the [Setting of the entire system (3/4) Shift information settings] sheet. Depending on one-shift or two-shift setting, the corresponding title is selected and displayed. The default titles are as follows: For one-shift setting: TODAY, BEFORE, 1WEEK For two-shift setting: CURRENT, PREV., 5 SHIFTS


- 114 -

7.11.1.2 Page switch method Pages as many as the value set in No. of pages of the [Parameter settings for Fault number list screen] sheet are created. You can switch between pages by using the two arrow buttons or the PAGE button at the bottom of the screen. When you press the PAGE button, the page selection screen appears over the fault count screen. On the page selection screen, the page selection buttons corresponding to the pages of the fault count screen are arranged. When you press a page selection button, the page selection screen disappears, and the page corresponding to the pressed button is displayed. On each page selection button, the default character string (page xx) is set. However, you can set a desired character string for display. The number of page selection buttons is 34 with E.200 an later, and is 14 with the earlier editions.

PAGE 1

PAGE 2

PAGE 3

PAGE 4

PAGE 5

PAGE 6

PAGE 7

PAGE 8

PAGE 9

PAGE 10

PAGE 11

PAGE 12

PAGE 13

PAGE 14

Page selection screen

7.11.1.3 Relationship with the operational situation screen The data of items 1 to 6 and 8 to 10 of the operational situation screen is displayed using the measurement function of this screen. So, the data to be displayed on the operational situation screen must also be set on this screen. For details, see the description of the operational situation screen.


- 115 -

7.11.2 Fault Count Related Setting - Setting Table (1/1) Set fault names, the addresses of fault count signals, and character strings to be displayed on the page selection buttons of the fault count screen.

NOTE A setting table for 34 pages is available with E2.00

and later. S22 : Set the name of a fault item. A1_1 : Set the address of a signal for starting the counting of the

number of faults and stop time. A1_2 : Set the address of a signal for stopping the counting of fault

stop time. N1 : Set the number of pages of the fault count screen. (Up to 34

pages can be used with E2.00 and later, and up to 14 pages can be used with the earlier editions.)

S10 : Set a character string to be displayed on a page selection button of the fault count screen. Up to two lines can be specified for display. By default, page xx is set. Set a desired character string if necessary.


- 116 -

7.12 CYCLE TIME MEASUREMENT SCREEN

NOTE When a cycle time measurement screen and cycle

time setting screen are incorporated, a cycle monitor screen, which can be created with the Series 18i-LNB, cannot be created. Only the former screens or the latter screen can be incorporated at a time.

FPAssist Version 6.04 and later support switching between these screens to enable only either of them to be used on a CNC.


The cycle time measurement screen enables you to measure cycle times for up to 36 types of operation items and display the latest ten measurement values. Cycle times are measured, regardless of whether this screen is displayed. You can choose a unit of displayed cycle time data between seconds and 0.1 seconds.

CYCLE TIME MEASUREMENT LIST 1/3 OPERATION ITEM STD. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 10

STANDARD

SET

Processing required to display this screen, such as the measurement of cycle times and the storing of measured values, is performed on the operator's panel. Cycle times are measured on the operator's panel, using the measurement start signals and measurement stop signals set on the [Parameter settings for Cycle time measurement list screen] sheet. Cycle times are measured using one of two types of methods: edge type and level type. One of the types must be selected according to the setting of a measurement type. (This function is available with E3.02 and later.)

FaultNumber

Cycle Time

RunningStatus

FaultMessage

3/3


- 117 -

7.12.1.1 Edge type operation The time from a rising edge of the measurement start signal to a rising edge of the measurement stop signal is measured. Each of the signals must have a pulse width of 500 ms or more. Each time a new measurement is made, the measured values displayed in columns 1 to 9 are shifted to right, and a newly measured cycle time value is entered in column 1. The measured value that has been displayed in column 10 is discarded.

Measurement start signal

Measurement stop signal

Cycle time

> 500ms

> 500ms

The measured values displayed on this screen are stored in the SRAM of the CNC, and are preserved even when the power to the CNC is turned off. The stored measured values can be deleted by setting the cycle time counter initialization signal set on the [Setting of the entire system (2/4) Setting of global screen] sheet to ON for the time set in Initialization signal on time of the same sheet or more. The stored measured values can also be deleted by all-clear operation of the SRAM of the CNC.

7.12.1.2 Level type operation The measurement start, measurement stop, and screen shift operations are the same as for the edge type. However, when the measurement start signal is set to 0 after the start of a time measurement, the time measurement is suspended. The time measurement is restarted when the measurement start signal is set to 1. So, the times during which the measurement start signal is 1 are measured in the period from a rising edge of the measurement start signal to a rising edge of the measurement stop signal. (This function is available with E3.02 and later.)

Measurement start signal

Measurement stop signal

Measurement

> 500ms

> 500ms

Measurement start/screen shift Measurement

start/screen shift

Measurementstop

Measurement suspended Measurement


- 118 -

The measured values displayed on this screen are stored in the SRAM of the CNC, and are preserved even when the power to the CNC is turned off. The stored measured values can be deleted by setting the cycle time counter initialization signal set on the [Setting of the entire system (2/4) Setting of global screen] sheet to ON for the time set in Initialization signal on time of the same sheet or more. The stored measured values can also be deleted by all-clear operation of the SRAM of the CNC.

7.12.2 Cycle Time Item Name and Measurement Signal Setting - Setting Table (1/1)

In the setting table (1/1), set cycle time item names, and the addresses of cycle time measurement start and stop signals.

S20 : Set the name of an item for cycle time measurement. A1_1 : Set the address of a measurement start signal. A1_2 : Set the address of a measurement stop signal. N1 : Set the number of decimal places (0 or 1) for cycle time

display. If 0 is set (so that no decimal places are displayed), a cycle time is displayed in seconds. If 1 is set (so that a cycle time is displayed to one decimal place), a cycle time is displayed in 0.1 seconds.

N2 : Set whether to use an item. (Use = 1, Not use = 0) N3 : Set the number of cycle time measurement screens (1 to 3). G1 : Set a cycle time setting screen name. N4 : Select a measurement type from 0:Edge type and 1:Level type.

(This function is available with E3.02 and later.)


- 119 -

7.13 CYCLE TIME SETTING SCREEN The cycle time setting screen is used to set a standard value displayed in the standard value field of the cycle time measurement screen. Register the screen in a spare line on the [Setting of the entire system (1/4) Screen registration] sheet.

CYCLE TIME STANDARD VALUE SETTING

CYL01 CYL03 CYL05 CYL07 CYL09 CYL11 CYL13 CYL15 CYL17




RETURN

S20: Set a character string to be displayed on a ten-key pad called to

set a standard cycle time value. For those lines that have 1 set in Mode, be sure to set a ten-key pad name. Do not include any space characters in a ten-key pad name.

G1: Set a cycle time measurement screen name. (In the columns of Decimal point and Mode, those values that are set on the cycle time measurement screen are automatically set when you press the CHECK button.)


- 120 -

7.14 OPERATIONAL SITUATION SCREEN


OPERATIONAL SITUATION 2001 2/01 17:10 TODAY BEFORE 1WEEK

NAME NUMBER ACC.TIME NUMBER ACC.TIME NUMBER ACC.TIME

[ITEM1] EQIPMENT FAULT <1> <1> <1> [ITEM2] TOOL CHANGE <2> <2> <2> [ITEM3] QUALITY CHECK <3> <3> <3> [ITEM4] CONTINUOUS OFF <4> <4> <4> [ITEM5] PARTS FULL <5> <5> <5> [ITEM6] NO PART <6> <6> <6> [ITEM7] CYCLE TIME 0.0 SEC [ITEM8] MACHINED PART 0

[ITEM9] OPERATION RATE 100.0 % 100.0 % 100.0 % [ITEM10] OK PART RATE 0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 %

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

R100

COMMUNI- CATION STATUS

R101 Items 1 to 6 display specified fault items among the fault items set on the fault count screen. The same data as set on the fault count screen is displayed. In these items, EQUIPMENT FAULT, TOOL CHANGE, QUALITY CHECK, CONTINUOUS OFF, PARTS FULL, and NO PART are set. Set the corresponding fault item numbers in the table of the [Parameter settings for Operational situation screen] sheet. The default name of item 7 is CYCLE TIME. This item displays the current value of a specified item among the items set on the cycle time measurement screen. In the table, set the number of the item for the entire cycle time. The default name of item 8 is MACHINED PART. This item displays the current (today) count value of a specified item among the fault items. To display the number of machined parts on this screen, the number of machined parts must be counted as a fault count beforehand.

3/3


- 121 -

Item 9 displays a value calculated using the formula below based on the values of items 1 to 6 and collection time (default: 460 minutes). The default name of item 9 is OPERATION RATE. Operation rate = (Collection time-<1>-<2>-<3>-<4>-<5>-<6>) / (Collection time-<5>-<6>) If the measured time values of any of items 1 to 6 are duplicate, no correct operation rate can be found. Ensure that multiple items are not measured for one cause. If items 1 to 6 are not set, no correct operation rate can be found. If items 1 to 6 include an unnecessary item, specify the number by setting a dummy fault monitor counter. With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, however, an improvement is made to calculate unnecessary items as 0. So, no dummy counter needs to be set.

Item 10 displays a value calculated using the formula below based on the count values of two specified items among the fault items. To display this item, the number of OK output parts and the number of input parts must be counted as fault counts beforehand. In items 10-1 and 10-2 of the [Parameter settings for Operational situation screen] sheet, specify the fault item numbers corresponding to the number of OK output parts and the number of input items, respectively. The default name of item 10 is OK PART RATE. OK part rate= Number of OK output parts (data specified in item 10-1) / Number of input parts (data specified in item 10-2) Set the character strings (TODAY, BEFORE, 1WEEK) to be displayed on the second line of the title of this screen in the [Setting of the entire system (3/4) Shift information settings] sheet. Depending on one-shift or two-shift setting, the corresponding title is selected and displayed. The default titles are as follows: For one-shift setting: TODAY, BEFORE, 1WEEK For two-shift setting: CURRENT, PREV., 5 SHIFTS For the fault data numbers set in items 8, 10-1, and 10-2, only the number of occurrences is count, and no time measurement is made. If the number of machined parts, the number of OK output parts, and the number of input parts are displayed on the tool exchange counter screen, set a count signal on both of the tool exchange count screen and fault count screen.


- 122 -

7.14.2 Operational Situation Item Setting The operational situation screen is displayed using the values of fault counters and the cycle time counters. In the setting table, set the fault counter numbers and cycle time counter numbers corresponding to operational situation items.

S20 : Set the name of an operational situation item. The default

character string is indicated in parentheses. N1_1 : Set the fault monitor counter number (fault item number) with

which an operational situation item is set. N1_2 : Set the cycle time counter number with which a cycle time to

be displayed on the operational situation screen is set. N2 : Set a collection time used for operation rate calculation. The

default value (460 minutes) is set. S5 : Name of an ANDON signal A2 : Address of an ANDON signal (2 bytes)


- 123 -

7.15 MANUAL OPERATION 2 SCREEN

7.15.1 Screen Specification


Page

LMP08 LMP09 LMP10 LMP11 LMP12 LMP13 LMP14 Button

Page







The manual operation 2 screen consists of the same display areas as the manual operation screen except that a motion sequence display subscreen is added to the numeric display area. By using the page switch button of the numeric display area, the screen display is switched. The motion sequence display subscreen displays the current motion name together with the following and preceding motion names as shown below. Based on the current motion number posted from the PMC, these names are displayed by referencing the motion number and motion name correspondence table set on the [Manual operation screen 2 (4/4) Settings for numeric display & motion sequence display] sheet.

1 [Previous motion name] 2 [Name of motion currently in progress] 3 [Next motion name]

Motion sequence display subscreen

ManualOperation

FaultDisplay

ToolChange

ToolOffset

1/3

1 ****** 2 ****** 3 ******


- 124 -

7.15.2 Lamp and Button Area Setting - Setting Table (1/4, 2/4, 3/4)

The method of lamp and button setting is the same as for the manual operation screen.

N1_1 : Set whether to use page 2 of the lamp display area. (Use = 1,

Not use = 0) N1_2 : Set whether to use page 2 of the manual button area. (Use = 1,

Not use = 0)


- 125 -

N1_3 : Set whether to use page 2 of the numeric display area. (Use = 1, Not use = 0)

S8 : Set a character string to be displayed on a page switch button. N2 : Set whether to use signal monitor display. (Use = 1, Not use =

0)

7.15.3 Numeric Display Area and Motion Sequence Setting - Setting Table (4/4)

The method of numeric display area setting is the same as for the manual operation screen. In the two tables below, set motion sequence display items.

N3_1 : Set whether to enable or disable motion sequence display.

(Enable 1, Disable = 0) N3_2 : Set the number of motion items to be displayed in the motion

sequence display area (number of final motions). N3_3 : Set the address where the number of an item currently in

motion to be displayed in the motion sequence area is stored. Store the number of an item currently in motion in binary format (2 bytes).

S12 : Set an operation name to be displayed in the motion sequence display area with up to 12 characters.

NOTE When using multiple manual operation 2 screens,

set the same values in the setting tables for each screen.

[Manual operation screen 2 (4/4) Settings for numeric display & motion sequence display]Screen name:

1NEED

No Pg Part name PMC address Decimal Name Mode No Motion namepoint 1 S12

1 KOGU1 A2 N1 S14 N2 2 S122 1 KOGU2 A2 N1 S14 N2 3 S123 KOGU3 A2 N1 S14 N2 4 S124 KOGU4 N4 N1 S8 N2 5 S125 KOGU1 A2 N1 S14 N2 6 S126 2 KOGU2 A2 N1 S14 N2 7 S127 KOGU3 A2 N1 S14 N2 8 S128 KOGU4 N4 N1 S8 N2 9 S12

10 S12Motion sequence display ON/OFF N3_1 11 S12

The number of motion items N3_2 12 S12Current motion number adr. N3_3 : :

70 S1271 S1272 S12

← →CHECK


- 126 -

7.16 OPERATION STATUS MONITOR SCREEN The operation status monitor screen is used for monitoring of the command signal and motion end signal of each motion. Up to three pages or up to 72 items can be monitored.

OPERATION MONITOR 1/3 No OPERATION CMD END No OPERATIONNAM CMD END

1 13

2 14

3 15

4 16

5 17

6 18

7 19

8 20

9 21

10 22

11 23

12 24

S24 : Set the name of a motion. A1_1 : Set the address of the command signal of a motion.

3/3


- 127 -

A1_2 : Set the address of the end signal (motion end) of a motion. N1 : Set the number of pages of the operation status monitor screen.

(Set motion items sequentially starting with No. 1 on the table above. If there is an item where neither a name nor a PLC address is set, the data up to the item immediately above such an item is regarded as valid.)


- 128 -

7.17 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDANCE SCREEN

CAUTION With FANUC PICTURE E2.00 and later, a flow

diagnostic screen is added. When creating a screen for diagnosis, use the flow diagnostic screen.

The troubleshooting guidance screen is used to display the presumed cause of an alarm issued from the machine and a corrective action to be taken. With FANUC PICTURE of E2.00 and later, a flow diagnostic screen is added. When creating a screen for diagnosis, use the flow diagnostic screen.

ManualOperation

ToolChange

ToolOffset

FaultDisplay

3/3PREV.FAULT

NEXTFAULT

[TITLE]

Measure :

Presumed cause :

FAULTRESET

DETAIL

When a 16-bit binary alarm code output from the PMC is received through the alarm code address set in [Setting of the entire system (2/4)], the data of the same screen number as the received code is displayed on this screen from the data set in the table below. Up to seven alarm codes can be received at a time, and a fault to be displayed can be selected using the PREV. FAULT or NEXT FAULT button. The display of the measure field can be scrolled using the ↑ and ↓ buttons. When you press the DETAIL button, the screen display jumps to the detailed guidance screen. When you press the FAULT RESET button, a signal (ON) is output to the address set in the output address (A1).


- 129 -

N1 : Set a guidance screen number. When an alarm code is sent

from the PLC/PMC through an address set in [Setting of the entire system (2/4)], the operator's panel displays the data of the same screen number as the received alarm code on the guidance screen.

S3 : Fault code S1 : Part code, check item count code S16 : Suffix/Alarm No. (NC error code)

Use half-size characters for S1, S3, and S16. S17 : Specify the same fault reset button as used on other screens.

When the same button as the fault reset button (named BTN07) on the fault display screen (named IJYOU) is to be created on the troubleshooting guidance screen, for example, enter IJYOU BTN07.

S32_1 : Character string to be displayed in the title field S10 : Character string to be displayed at the start of the presumed

cause field. The default is Presumed cause:. After this character string, the character string set in S22 is displayed.

S22 : Character string to be displayed in line 1 of the presumed cause field

S32_2 : Character string to be displayed in lines 2 and 3 of the presumed cause field.

For S22 and S32, half-size or full-size characters can be used.


- 130 -

S10 : Character string to be displayed at the start of the measure

field. After this character string, the character string set in S255 is displayed.

S255 : Character string to be displayed in the measure field. For new line operation, enter ALT + Return. If a character string longer than 255 half-size characters is to be used, enter the characters beyond the 255 characters in the right-hand column. The character strings entered in the left-hand and right-hand columns are concatenated when displayed.

The character strings entered above are displayed using enlarged characters on the screen.

7.17.1 Method of Alarm Code Transfer Alarm codes must be transferred from the PLC/PMC to the operator's panel periodically. If the same alarm code cannot be received even when the time set in Alarm expiration time of [Setting of the entire system (2/4)] has elapsed, the alarm is assumed to be reset. The operator's panel can receive and display up to seven alarm codes at a time. Alarms beyond the first seven alarms are ignored. The alarm code transfer procedure shown below is used. Addresses used for alarm code transfer are to be set in Alarm code address, "Acquired alarm code" signal address, and "Read alarm code" signal address of [Setting of the entire system (2/4)].

n-th dataAlarm code(PLC → NC)

Read request(PLC → NC)

Read completion(NC → PLC)

(n+1)-th data


- 131 -

7.17.2 Detailed Guidance Screen This screen is displayed when you press the DETAIL button on the troubleshooting guidance screen. The left-hand side of this screen displays an image indicating a fault location. The right-hand side of this screen provides a detailed description. If multiple detailed guidance screens are provided for one fault, you can choose a desired detailed guidance screen with the PREV. FAULT BUTTON and NEXT FAULT button. The ↑ and ↓ buttons are used to scroll the detailed description area. When you press the RETURN button on this screen, the screen display returns to the troubleshooting guidance screen. On the flow diagnostic screen, a similar detailed guidance screen can be created.

PREV.FAULT

NEXTFAULT

FAULTRESET

RETURN

Imagedisplay area

Detaileddescription area

The maximum allowable size of an image displayed in the image display area is 300 dots (horizontal) × 400 dots (vertical). So, an image file to be used must be adjusted not to exceed this size beforehand by using image processing software. An image is displayed in 256 colors on the CNC screen, so that the displayed colors of an image may differ from the original colors.


- 132 -

When you click this line additionbutton, cells for 10 lines are added tothe table.

N1 : Screen number. Set the screen number of the troubleshooting

guidance screen from which a detailed guidance screen is called. If multiple detailed guidance screens are needed for a fault, the same screen number can be set in multiple lines.

S50 : Set the name of an image file to be displayed on the screen when a detailed guidance screen is called. Place image files in a folder, and set only a desired file name (including the extension) here. Place image files in the PhotoData folder under the project folder of FANUC PICTURE.

Specify a bit map or JPEG image file of 256-color image. When 256 colors are used, the size of the operator's panel screen data file (cex0fpdt.mem) can be reduced.

S255 : Set a character string for a detailed description.


- 133 -

7.18 FLOW DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN

7.18.1 Screen Configuration When an NC or machine fault occurs, the flow diagnostic screen facilitates the determination of the cause and action for correction. By setting a diagnostic message for an alarm or fault beforehand, fault diagnosis can be performed conversationally. This screen is linked with the fault diagnosis function of the CNC. So, when you touch the Diagnosis Graphics or Diagnosis Monitor button, the waveform diagnostic screen of the CNC can be displayed. (FANUC PICTURE of E2.00 and later is needed to use this screen.)

FAULTdisplay

CYCLETIME

RUNSTATUS

FAULTFLOW

3/3

BTN02BTN01

[TITLE]

[FLOW DIAGNOSE MESSAGE]

[Presumed cause]

BTN07 BTN05BTN03 BTN04 BTN06

DiagnosisGraphic

DiagnosisMonitor

NEXT

FAULT

PREV.FAULT

FAULT

RESET

PREV.STEP

YES NO DETAIL

S.HOLD

CONT-NUE

READ-DIAG FLOW

7.18.1.1 Screen function When a 16-bit binary alarm code output from the PMC is received, the message for the same screen number (ALM number) as the received alarm code among the messages set in the table of [flow diagnostic screen (1/4)] is displayed in the TITLE field and Presumed cause field of this screen. An alarm code is received through the PMC address set in the Alarm code address field in the setting table of [Setting of the entire system (2/4)]. Up to seven alarm codes can be received at a time, and an alarm message to be displayed can be selected using the PREV. FAULT or NEXT FAULT button. The FLOW DIAGNOSE MESSAGE area of the screen displays questions (flow diagnostic messages) for identifying the cause of a fault. When you reply to a displayed question with the YES or NO button, the next question appears, depending on whether you replied YES or NO. Thus, a flow diagnosis leading to the identification of the cause of a fault or proper corrective action can be formed. When you touch the PREV. STEP button, you can return to the previous question. Set flow diagnostic messages in the setting table of [Flow diagnostic screen (2/4)].


- 134 -

For each flow diagnostic message, a detailed description and image data can be registered ([Flow diagnostic screen (3/4)]). When a flow diagnostic message with a detailed description and image data registered is displayed, the DETAIL button on the screen blinks. By touching the DETAIL button at this time, the detailed description screen appears, and a registered image and detailed description are displayed. An image file in the BMP format or JPEG format can be displayed. To each flow diagnostic message, a group of manual buttons can be assigned. One group includes seven buttons. Data such as characters, a color, and PMC address can be set with these buttons as with ordinary manual buttons ([Flow diagnostic screen (4/4)]). Up to 50 groups can be defined. If a button group is assigned to the flow diagnostic message currently displayed on the screen, the seven buttons at the bottom of the screen function as the buttons assigned to the message. This screen can also be used for CNC fault diagnosis. If a CNC alarm is issued, a flow message prepared beforehand for CNC fault diagnosis is displayed. So, the cause of the CNC alarm can be diagnosed as in the case of machine diagnosis. If a displayed CNC flow diagnostic message includes a prompt for checking the servo waveform, touch the Diagnosis Graphic or Diagnosis Monitor button to jump to the CNC waveform diagnostic screen. After checking the waveform on the CNC waveform diagnostic screen, you can return to this screen to continue flow diagnosis. Up to seven alarms, including CNC alarms and machine alarms, can be displayed on this screen at a time. If eight or more alarms are issued at a time, all alarms beyond the first seven alarms are ignored. As a result of CNC alarm diagnosis, you may find that the fault is caused by machine trouble. Considering such a case, a function for calling a machine diagnosis flow from a CNC diagnosis flow is incorporated. For this function, the special message IDs (starting with M) listed below are reserved. So, if the machine tool builder creates a diagnosis flow starting with a special message ID, diagnosis integrating the CNC and machine becomes possible. If no message is assigned to a special message ID, the end of the diagnosis flow is assumed when the special message ID is called.

No. Message ID Alarm name Presumed cause

1 M205 Rigid mode DI OFF

The rigid mode DI signal (G061.0) is not set to 1 when G84 (G74, G88) is executed.

2 M407 Excessive synchronous axis error

Two axes to be moved synchronously lost mechanical synchronism with each other and are placed in a twisted state.

3 M409 Abnormal load detected

A mechanical collision or twist occurred, resulting in a load torque higher than a normal operation value.


- 135 -


4 M410 Excessive stop error

A mechanical collision or twist occurred, disabling an axis from reaching a target position.

5 M411 Excessive move error

A mechanical collision or twist occurred, disabling an axis from moving.

6 M420 Excessive torque difference

Two axes to be moved synchronously lost mechanical synchronism with each other, resulting in a large torque difference.

7 M421 Excessive semi-closed loop error

With a closed-loop machine, a shift occurred between the motion of the motor and the motion of the separate detector for a cause such as a mechanical twist.

8 M436 OVC alarm

A mechanical collision or twist occurred, resulting in a large load and the flow of an excessive current.

In the future, a message ID to which a jump is made from a CNC diagnosis flow may be added. So, do no use a message ID starting with M which may or may not be included in the table above. In the CNC, servo waveform data is taken into the waveform diagnosis memory at all times. When a servo alarm is issued, the storing of new waveform data is stopped, and the waveform data immediately before the issue of the alarm is preserved in the waveform diagnosis memory. While the storing of waveform data is stopped, the upper-right corner of the screen displays the indicator S.HOLD. This indicator is displayed on any other screens while a menu button is displayed. This indicator disappears when the storing of servo waveform data is resumed. Before restarting operation, clear the data preservation state on the CNC fault diagnostic screen, and check that the indicator has disappeared. If operation is restarted without clearing the data preservation state, servo waveform data is not stored. So, a correct decision cannot be made when an alarm is issued next. With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, the indicator S.HOLD functions as a button for clearing the data preservation state on the CNC fault diagnosis screen when the Series 18i-LNB is used. Before restarting operation, press the indicator button S.HOLD to restart the memorization of the servo waveform.


- 136 -

7.18.1.2 Method of alarm code transfer Alarm codes must be transferred from the PLC/PMC to the operator's panel periodically. If the same alarm code cannot be received even when the time set in Alarm expiration time of [Setting of the entire system (2/4)] has elapsed, the alarm is assumed to be reset. The operator's panel can receive and display up to seven alarm codes at a time. Alarms beyond the first seven alarms are ignored. The alarm code transfer procedure shown below is used. Addresses used for alarm code transfer are to be set in Alarm code address, "Acquired alarm code" signal address, and "Read alarm code" signal address of [Setting of the entire system (2/4)].

n-th dataAlarm code(PLC → NC)

Read request(PLC → NC)

Read completion(NC → PLC)

(n+1)-th data

7.18.1.3 Method of flow diagnostic message creation For the method of flow diagnostic message creation, see Appendix C, "FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT PROCEDURE". For creation of flow diagnostic messages for multi-language display, see Appendix C.3, "CREATING FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES FOR MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY".


- 137 -

7.18.1.4 Detailed description screen This screen is displayed when you press the DETAIL button on the flow diagnostic screen. The left-hand side of this screen displays an image indicating a fault location. The right-hand side of this screen provides a detailed description. When you press the RETURN button on this screen, the screen display returns to the flow diagnostic screen.

FAULTRESET

RETURN

Imagedisplay area

Detaileddescriptiondisplay area

7.18.1.5 Flow diagnosis continuation function after the power Is turned on again

With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, a function is added which turns off the power to the machine during a diagnosis tracing the flow of a fault, conducts a specified diagnostic investigation, then turns on the power again to enable the diagnosis to be continued. To restart a flow diagnosis after the power is turned on again, press the CONTNUE button on the flow diagnostic screen.


- 138 -

7.18.1.6 Flow read function With FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, a function for reading the flow of a fault on the operator's panel is added. The flow of a fault can be read by pressing the READ-DIAG FLOW button on the flow diagnostic screen. So, the function can be used, for example, to debug the machine diagnostic flow. The flow read screen can be displayed by pressing the READ-DIAG FLOW button on the flow diagnostic screen.

CNC flow message list screen Machine flow message list screen When the flow list screen is displayed, the machine flow list screen is first displayed. Twenty fault titles are displayed per page. The page switch button is used to switch between pages. Moreover, by entering a desired flow number by using the "#FLOW" popup ten-key pad number display, the user can switch to the desired page directly. Flow diagnostic data consists of two types of messages: machine flow messages and CNC flow message. The MACHINE FLOW LIST button and the CNC FLOW LIST button are available to switch between the two types of flow lists. By pressing the SHOW FLOW button, the screen display can be switched to the flow read screen displaying the diagnostic flow of the number indicated by the #FLOW button.


- 139 -

Flow detail screen

Indications and operation buttons related to the flow read screen

Screen type

Display item/ button name Description

#FLOW (title) Displays an alarm number used to post a machine/CNC fault to the operator's panel. On the screen display, such an alarm number is referred to as a flow #. A flow # is specified to display detailed flow diagnostic data.

FAULT CODE Displays a fault code assigned to each fault. A code, location, check, and equipment code are displayed in this order.

FAULT TITLE Displays a fault title assigned to each fault.

#FLOW (button) Enter a flow # for switching to the desired page of the flow list. Enter a flow # to be displayed on the flow detail screen.

SHOW FLOW Switches the screen display to the flow detail screen of flow # displayed by #FLOW.

Flow list screen

(Up/down page switch) Switches the page of the flow list screen in a selected arrow direction. Flow data display field, YES, NO, PREV. STEP, DETAIL

Displays the same data as displayed on the flow diagnostic screen. For the flow of a fault that occurs on each axis, however, "?" is indicated as an axis name. The buttons also operate in the same way as on the flow diagnostic screen.

#FLOW Enter a flow # to display the corresponding flow detail screen. SHOW FLOW This button has no effect, because the flow detail screen is already displayed.

Flow detail screen

(Up/down page switch) Switches the screen display to the flow detail screen of the flow # immediately preceding or following the flow # of the current flow detail screen.

READING END Ends the flow read screen and returns the screen display to the flow diagnostic screen.

MACHINE FLOW LIST Switches the screen display to the machine flow message list screen. Common

CNC FLOW LIST Switches the screen display to the CNC flow message list screen.


- 140 -

7.18.2 Fault Title and Presumed Cause Setting - Setting Table (1/4)

When you click this line addition button, cellsfor the number of lines selected in the left-handcombo box are added to the table.

S6_1 : Set a character string for indicating a path where an alarm is

issued when 2-path control is used. If an alarm is issued on path 1 when 2-path control is used, the name set in this item is added to the lower digits of a suffix/alarm No.

S6_2 : Set a character string for indicating a path where an alarm is issued when 2-path control is used. If an alarm is issued on path 2 when 2-path control is used, the name set in this item is added to the lower digits of a suffix/alarm No.

S17 : Specify the number of the same fault reset button as used on other screens. When the same button as the fault reset button (named BTN07) on the fault display screen (named IJYOU) is to be created on the troubleshooting guidance screen, for example, enter IJYOU BTN07.

S10 : Character string to be displayed at the start of line 1 of the presumed cause field of the flow diagnostic screen. After this character string, a character string for line 1 of the presumed cause field is displayed. The total length of a character string set in this item and a character string for the presumed cause field must not exceed 32 half-size characters or 16 full-size characters.

N1 : Set a flow diagnostic screen number. When an alarm code is sent from the PMC through an address set in [Setting of the entire system (2/4)], the operator's panel displays the data of the same screen number as the received alarm code on the flow diagnostic screen. (0 to 65535)

S3 : Fault code (3 half-size characters max.) S2 : Part code (1 half-size character max.) S1 : Maintenance level code (1 half-size character max.) S16 : Suffix/alarm No.(NC error code) (16 half-size characters

max.) S32_1 : Character string to be displayed in the title field of the flow

diagnostic screen (32 half-size characters or 16 full-size characters max.)


- 141 -

S32_2 : Character string to be displayed in lines 1, 2 and 3 of the presumed cause field of the flow diagnostic screen (32 half-size characters or 16 full-size characters max.)

S6_3 : Set the message ID of the first flow message for the corresponding diagnosis flow. (6 half-size characters max.)

Z2 : This field is not used.

NOTE When you click the line addition button, the table

can be expanded by the number of lines selected in the combo box to the left of the button.


- 142 -

7.18.3 Flow Diagnostic Message Setting - Setting Table (2/4)

S6 : Message ID and next message ID

A message ID is an ID assigned to a flow diagnostic message. A character string not longer than 6 half-size characters can be used. As a next message ID, specify the ID of a flow diagnostic screen to be displayed next when you reply YES or NO to a flow diagnostic message. Set -1 when there is no jump destination because of the last flow stage. Do not use message IDs starting with M. Those message IDs that start with M are reserved message IDs to be referenced from CNC alarm diagnosis flows.

S128 : Enter a flow diagnostic message. When the first 32 characters of a character string entered are displayed, the character string is automatically wrapped to the next line unless you intentionally perform a new line operation. For a new line operation, enter \n or enter ALT + Enter. (128 half-size characters or 64 full-size characters max.)

N1 : While the flow diagnostic message of a line is displayed on the screen, the button group specified in the line is assigned to the manual buttons at the bottom of the screen. Specify a number in the GP column of the manual button setting table of [Flow diagnostic screen (4/4)]. (Number from 1 to 50)

S255 : Note. Use this column for memorandums. (255 half-size characters max.)

S10 : Automatic diagnosis function and Argument are not used.

NOTE When you click the line addition button, the table

can be expanded by the number of lines selected in the combo box to the left of the button.


- 143 -

7.18.4 Image File Name and Detail Message Setting - Setting Table (3/4)

S6: Message ID. Set the same message ID as for a flow diagnostic

message (setting table 2/4) that calls a detailed description screen.

S50: Set the name of an image file to be displayed when a detailed description screen is called. Place image files in the PhotoData folder under the project folder of FANUC PICTURE, and set only a desired file name (including the extension) here. An image file in the BMP (bit map) format or JPEG format only can be displayed on the screen. Specify a bit map or JPEG image file of 256-color image. When 256 colors are used, the size of the operator's panel flow diagnostic screen data file (cex2mcal.mem) can be reduced.

NOTE The maximum allowable size of an image

displayed in the image display area is 300 dots (horizontal) x 400 dots (vertical). So, an image file to be used must be adjusted not to exceed this size beforehand by using image processing software. An image is displayed in 256 colors on the NC screen, so that the displayed colors of an image may differ from the original colors.

S255: Set a character string for a detailed description.


- 144 -

7.18.5 Button Area Setting - Setting Table (4/4) Using the setting table (4/4), define the functions of the operation buttons displayed at the bottom of the screen. Up to 50 groups, each consisting of 7 buttons, can be defined. Specify a group number (GP) for each flow diagnostic message, and relate it with a desired manual button group. When a flow diagnostic message is displayed on the screen, the operation button group related to the message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Up to 50 groups, each consisting of 7 manual buttons, can be set. The method of setting is the same as for the fault display screen.


- 145 -

7.19 LOAD TORQUE MONITOR SCREEN For the types and operation of the load torque monitor screen, refer to "FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist/Cycle Monitor and Load Torque Monitor Screen Operator's Manual (B-66274EN)". The load torque monitor screen is available with FPAssist Version 4.05 and later. A capability for setting four spindles per path is available with FPAssist Version 5.20 and later. A function for specifying a load torque measurement sequence number for each main program (up to four main programs), and a function for posting the type of error handling taken when a load torque excess alarm is generated are available with FPAssist Version 5.30 and later.

7.19.1 Load Torque Monitor Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1)

[Load torque screen 1/1] Screen name:

OKScreens for the 2nd PATH.

Set if you create 2nd PATH screens.(0: No 2nd PATH screens, 1:Create 2nd PATH screens) N1

Abreviated name of spindles and axes. (within 4 alpha-numeric characters) Setting items PATH 1 PATH 2

Existence and name of the 1st spindle (0: no existence) S4 S4 Existence and name of the 2nd spindle S4 S4 Existence and name of the 1st axis S4 S4 Existence and name of the 2nd axis S4 S4 Existence and name of the 3rd axis S4 S4 Existence and name of the 4th axis S4 S4 Existence and name of the 5th axis S4 S4 Existence and name of the 6th axis S4 S4 Existence and name of the 7th axis S4 Existence and name of the 8th axis S4

Spindle assignment for each PATH. Spindles controlled Spindles controlled by PATH 1 controller by PATH 2 controller

1st spindle 2nd spindle 1st spindle 2nd spindle

1 N2 N2 N2 N2 Spindles used for the 2 N2 N2 N2 N2 machining of PATH 1 3 N2 N2 N2 N2

4 N2 N2 N2 N2 1 N2 N2 N2 N2

Spindles used for the 2 N2 N2 N2 N2 machining of PATH 2 3 N2 N2 N2 N2

4 N2 N2 N2 N2

I/O addresses to store Load Torque data. Setting items PATH 1 PATH 2

Store Load Torque data in I/O area (1) or not (0). N3 N3 Top address of data storage I/O area.(D or R area) A2 A2 Data size selection (0: 432 byte, 1: 696 byte) N4 N4

Set of action type at load torque failure Button name Output signal

Type1 S6 S6 A1Type2 S6 S6 A1Type3 S6 S6 A1Type4 S6 S6 A1

Spindle number

CHECKCHECK


- 146 -

N1 : Set 1 when a two-path system is used and the load torque on the axes of path 2 is monitored. Set 0 when a single-path system is used or when a two-path system is used but the load torque on the axes of path 2 is not monitored.

S4 : Set whether to use a spindle or servo axis, and set an axis name for each path. A name set here is used on the load torque display screen. Set 0 for an axis not used. For an axis to be used, set an axis name not longer than 4 half-size characters or 2 full-size characters. With the Series 18i-LNA, up to six axes can be set for path 1, and up to four axes can be set for path 2.

N2 : This setting table sets the correspondence between spindles 1, 2, 3, and 4 set on the load monitor data setting screen for each path and the actual spindles. Set 1 for each axis to be actually used. If a spindle is shared, for example, on a two-path lathe, this setting table enables the load torque data of the same spindle to be displayed on both paths.

N3 : Measured load torque data can be transferred to the D or R area of the PMC. When a transfer machine is used, for example, this function is used to transfer the data of each sub-station to the master station via FL-NET. Set 1 to use this function. Set 0 not to use this function.

A2 : Specify to which of the D and R areas of the PMC load torque data is to be transferred.

N4 : Select a load torque data transfer size. 0: 432 bytes 1: 696 bytes S6 : These select buttons are used to select an action to be taken

when a load torque excess alarm is issued during load torque measurement. Four types of action can be set. Specify a character string indicating an action with up to two lines each consisting of up to six half-size characters. You need not specify all four types. By default, type 1 is selected.

When a load torque excess alarm is issued, a PMC ladder should check the status of the signals set for these buttons to determine the selected type, and appropriate action should be taken.

Generally, the following action types are used: <1> Warning: A warning lamp is lit. <2> Cycle stop: Operation stops at the end of a cycle. <3> Return: A return program is executed when an

excess alarm is issued. <4> SBK stop: Single block stop

A1 : Set a signal address to be assigned to an action type select button used when an excess alarm is issued.


- 147 -

7.20 QUALITY CHECK SCREEN

7.20.1 Screen Configuration The quality check screen is used to manage quality checking at tool exchange time. The screen consists of a quality check direction screen for indicating the numbers of tools to be checked and check directions, and a quality check parameter screen for setting a machining point (flag point/cycle point) where each tool is to be checked for quality. The quality check screen is available with FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, and can be incorporated when the FANUC PMC is used. To create a quality check screen, the following conditions must be satisfied: <1> The tool exchange counter 1 screen or the tool exchange counter 2

screen is required. <2> The FANUC PMC is required.

Quality check direction screen

Quality check parameter screen


- 148 -

Indications and operation buttons related to the quality check screen Screen

type Display item/ button name

Description

(DIRECTION) CHECK The check button of a tool number to be checked for quality is turned on. After checking the machining state of a tool, press the button for the checked tool to notify the PMC that the checking is completed.

ALL CHECK Notifies the PMC of the completion of the checking of multiple tools at a time.

Quality check direction screen

QUALITY PARAM Switches the screen display to the quality check parameter screen.

(FLAG) ON/OFF Turn ON the button for a new tool that is to be checked for quality at a flag point. Pressing each button switches the state between ON and OFF alternatively.

(CYCLE) ON/OFF Turn ON the button for a new tool that is to be checked for quality at a cycle point. Pressing each button switches the state between ON and OFF alternatively.

ALL OFF Turns OFF the flag/cycle setting buttons for all tools.

ALL ON (FLAG) Turns ON the flag setting buttons for all tools. This operation turns OFF all buttons on the cycle side.

ALL ON (CYCLE) Turns ON the cycle setting buttons for all tools. This operation turns OFF all buttons on the flag side.

DIRECT. QUALITY CHECK

Switches the screen display to the quality check direction screen.

Quality check parameter screen

EQUIPMENT OPERATING/SETTING DISABLED

Displayed when the quality check parameter screen operation interlock signal is on. During interlock operation, the ON/OFF settings of the flag/cycle buttons cannot be changed.

TOOL (title)

Displays, as titles, tool numbers from T01 up to T64 managed with the tool exchange counter screen. The displayed tool numbers correspond to the sequential numbers (numbers in the No. item) registered on the tool exchange counter screen. The tool exchange counter screen can manage up to 48 tools, so the 49th tool and up can be specified for management by the PMC.

Common

(Page switch) When the quality check direction screen or the quality check parameter screen has a second page, this button switches the screen display between the pages.


- 149 -

7.20.2 Quality Check PMC Ladder and Timing Chart This section describes operation from the operator's panel and processing on a PMC ladder. Flag point or cycle point stop information for each tool is preserved in the D area of the nonvolatile PMC memory at all times. <1> The operator's panel posts a tool number whose exchange counter

has changed from 0 to 1 in tool exchange counter processing. (New tool notification signal)

<2> Upon reception of the new tool notification signal, the PMC checks the nonvolatile memory to see if a flag point stop or cycle point stop is set for the new tool. If a stop point is set, machining stop processing is performed at a proper position.

<3> When the PMC confirms the stop of machining, the check direction button for the new tool is turned on in order to request the operator to make a quality check, then the quality check direction switch signal is turned on.

<4> When the check direction button is turned on, the operator's panel turns off the new tool notification signal.

<5> In response to the check direction, the operator is to check the machined workpiece for quality and press the check button for the tool.

<6> Upon reception of the output from the check button, the PMC turns off the button lamp signal. Moreover, whether other tools have been checked is checked. When all checks have been made, machining is restarted.

Quality check function/timing chart with the PMC The shaded portions represent processing on the PMC side. Count-up signal T1 Tool counter value T1 (0→1) (1→2) New tool notification T1

Machining stop command (flag/cycle) Machining stop confirmation Quality check button T1 ON Quality check direction screen switch request Pressing of quality check button T1 Check completion confirmation Restart of machining


- 150 -

7.20.3 Quality Check Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1)

N1 : Specify the number of tools to be checked for quality. A

number from 1 to 64 can be specified. The tool exchange counter 2 screen can manage up to 48 tools.

When a number is entered here, the number of pages is automatically displayed.

One page can display up to 32 tools. So, up to two pages are created.

A1_1 : Specify a start signal address to be assigned to check button lamp signals on the quality check direction screen. Starting from the bit 0 position of a specified signal address, bits as many as the number of tools are used in ascending order from T01 to T02 and so on.

When a start address is entered, the end address of the byte(s) used is automatically indicated. The signals in this range must not be assigned to any other purposes.

A1_2 : Specify a start signal address to be assigned to the output signals for check buttons on the quality check direction screen. Starting from the bit 0 position of a specified signal address, bits as many as the number of tools are used in ascending order from T01 to T02 and so on.


A1_3 : Specify a start signal address to be assigned to the output signals for flag point buttons on the quality check parameter screen. Starting from the bit 0 position of a specified signal address, bits as many as the number of tools are used in ascending order from T01 to T02 and so on.

Specify an address in the D area of the nonvolatile PMC signal area. When a start address is entered, the end address of the byte(s) used is automatically indicated. The signals in this range must not be assigned to any other purposes.

A1_4 : Specify a start signal address to be assigned to the output signals for cycle point buttons on the quality check parameter screen. Starting from the bit 0 position of a specified signal address, bits as many as the number of tools are used in ascending order from T01 to T02 and so on.

[Quality check screen 1/1]6 Screen name:

-10 OK Num.page

Number tool(1-64) N1

Top address Bottom addressQuality check button Lump signal A1_1

Output signa A1_2Parameter quality button Output flag A1_3

Output cycle A1_4New tool notification signal A1_5Interlock signal to set A1_6

CHECK


- 151 -

Specify an address in the D area of the nonvolatile PMC signal area. When a start address is entered, the end address of the byte(s) used is automatically indicated. The signals in this range must not be assigned to any other purposes.

A1_5 : Specify a start signal address to be assigned to the output signal for the new tool notification signal (for posting a tool whose tool change counter has changed from 0 to 1). Starting from the bit 0 position of a specified signal address, bits as many as the number of tools are used in ascending order from T01 to T02 and so on. In general, the number of tools on the tool exchange counter screen matches the number of tools on the quality check screen. However, up to the number of tools on the quality check screen is posted.


A1_6 : Set an interlock signal to be referenced by a button on the quality check parameter screen.


- 152 -

7.21 CYCLE MONITOR SCREEN The cycle monitor screen is available with FPAssist Version 5.10 and later, and can be incorporated when the Series 18i-LNB is used. For the types and operation of the cycle monitor screen, refer to "FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist/Cycle Monitor and Load Torque Monitor Screen Operator's Manual (B-66274EN)". If a cycle monitor screen that can be created when the Series 18i-LNB is used is incorporated, a cycle time measurement screen and cycle time setting screen cannot be created. Only the former screen or the latter screens can be incorporated at a time.

7.21.1 Cycle Monitor Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1) Conventionally, in the cycle time display field of the number display field on each operation screen, a cycle time value obtained by measurement using the cycle time measurement screen is displayed. If the cycle monitor screen is incorporated, the cycle time measurement screen cannot be incorporated. So, the cycle monitor screen provides means for cycle time measurement of each operation screen in order to substitute for the cycle time measurement screen. As with the cycle time measurement screen, set a proper signal in the item of Motion1 below.

S10 : Set a machine number of Toyota Motor. This information is used for identification in a data file name

created by the cycle monitor. S20 : Need not be set. A1_1 : Specify an entire cycle time measurement start signal. A1_2 : Specify an entire cycle time measurement stop signal. N1 : Set 0 or 1. N2 : Set 1 to make an entire cycle time measurement. Set 0 if such a

measurement is unnecessary. N3 : Select a measurement type. 0: Edge type 1: Level type

[Cycle Monitor screen]14 Screen name:

-10 OK Measurement type. N3

S10 No Pg Item Name PMC address Decimal ModeStart Stop point

1 1 Motion1 S20 A1_1 A1_2 N1 N2

Machine No.

CHECK


- 153 -

7.22 SAFETY IO STATUS DISPLAY SCREEN Soft safety circuit diagnosis screens are used to diagnose the dual check safety function of the Series 18i-LNB and are made up of the following three types of screen: <1> Safety I/O status display screen indicating the status of the I/O

signals of the safety I/O unit <2> Built-in safety logic status screen indicating the status of the

built-in safety circuit <3> TR safety I/O status screen indicating the status of the safety

signals transferred between stations by the FL-NET safety function

When the dual check safety function is to be used, be sure to include the <1> safety I/O status display screen and <2> built-in safety logic status screen. The <3> TR safety I/O status screen is included only when the FL-NET safety function is used.

7.22.1 Screen Configuration The safety I/O status display screen shows the input/output status of the safety I/O unit used by the dual check safety function. A screen for a single-path system and a screen for a two-path system are provided. The NAME column indications can be customized according to the application of each input or output, so the status of safety-related signals can be checked at a glance. In the input and output columns, the status of the input/output signals of each connector of the safety I/O unit is indicated. (OFF: Black, ON: Green) The A column shows the status of the signals on the I/O Link, and the B column shows the status of the signals on the serial link (FSSB). Safety I/O status display screen for a single-path system


- 154 -

Safety I/O status display screen for a two-path system

The addresses of the signals displayed in the lamp display area of the screen are as follows:

Input Path1 Path2

Input Output Connector

A1 B1 B2 Output Connector

A B A B CNA1 N333#4 X01#4 X09#4 M336#0 CNB1 N335#4 X03#4 N341#1 Y01#1CNA2 N334#0 X02#0 CNB2 N335#5 X03#5 N341#2 Y01#2CNA3 N334#6 X02#6

CNB3 N335#6 X03#6 N341#3 Y01#3

CNA4 N332#1 X00#1 X08#1 M337#0 CNB4 N335#0 X03#0 CNA5 N334#1 X02#1 CNB5 N335#1 X03#1 CNA6 N334#7 X02#7

CNB6 N335#2 X03#2

CNA7 N332#2 X00#2 X08#2 M337#1 Path1 N333#6 X01#6 M336#1 Y00#1N334#2 X02#2

CNB7Path2 N343#6 X09#6 M347#1 Y06#1

N334#3 X02#3 Y112#4 CNB8 N335#3 X03#3 N341#0 Y01#0CNA8 N334#4 X02#4 Y00#3

CNA9 X334#5 X02#5

Y112#5 CNB9

Y113#2

CNA10 N332#3 X00#3 X08#3 M337#2 If a mismatch is detected with a dual signal, the name field of the signal blinks in red. Once a signal mismatch occurs, the red blinking status in the name field is maintained. Even if the signal status changes to a match, the original blue indication is not resumed. However, the status indication lamp of the signal does not preserve the status present when a mismatch is detected, but displays the current status at all times. The safety IO status display screen is available with FPAssist Version 5.10 (FANUC PICTURE&FPAssist E5.00) and later and can be incorporated when the Series 18i-LNB is used.


- 155 -

CAUTION When a mismatch occurs with a dual signal, the

following signal is set to 1: Mismatch notification signal M425.7 By using this signal, make an automatic screen call

setting on the machine operator's panel so that the safety IO status display screen can be called automatically when a mismatch occurs.


- 156 -

7.22.2 Built-in Safety Logic Status Screen The built-in safety logic status screen shows the status of the I/Os of the built-in safety circuit and emergency stop input signals monitored by the built-in safety circuit. (For the built-in safety circuit, refer to "Series 18i-LNB Connection Manual (Hardware)" B-63933EN.) From this screen, you can understand the status of the built-in safety circuit. The addresses of the signals displayed in the lamp display area of the screen are shown on the next page. Signal names can be changed with FPAssist. When you touch a sky-blue signal name field, you can call a ladder diagram that uses the signal.

The built-in safety logic status screen, available with FPAssist Version 5.50 (FANUC PICTURE&FPAssist E5.06) and later, can be included when the Series 18i-LNB is used.

Showing the status of the CNC emergency stop signal inputs, emregency stop signals output from the built-in safety circuit to CNC, MC (MCC) drive outputs and off check siganls for servo power supply control. (For each of paths 1 and 2)

Showing the status of I/O of the

operation preparation circuit and

emergency stop and off check signals

monitored by the circuit internally

Showing the status of I/Os of power

supply circuit 1 and off check signals


Showing the status of I/Os of power

supply circuit 2 and off check signals


Showing the status of emergency stop signals monitored by the built-in safety circuit


- 157 -

Addresses of the signals displayed in the lamp display area in the left half of the screen

Addresses of the signals displayed in the lamp display area in the left half of the screen

Input Internal Output A B A B A B

MASTER ON BTN N352#0 G01#0 MASTER ON COND. N352#1 G01#1 EMG STOP COND. N352#2 G01#2 M348#7 F01#7 OFF CHECK N352#3 G01#3 N335#4 X03#4

Operation preparation circuit

MASTER ON X117#0 X117#1

POWER DOWN COND. N353#2 G02#2 OFF CHECK N353#3 G02#3 N335#5 X03#5

Power supply circuit

POWER SUPPLY X117#2 X117#3

POWER DOWN COND. N353#6 G02#6 OFF CHECK N353#7 G02#7 N335#6 X03#6

Power supply circuit

POWER SUPPLY X117#4 X117#5

Input Internal Output A B A B A B

EMG STOP FOR CNC N342#0 G00#0 G08#4 F00#0OFF CHECK N333#6 X01#6

Path 1 Servo power control SERVO PWR SUPPLY X116#3 X117#6

OFF CHECK N343#6 X09#6 Path 1

Servo power control

SERVO PWR SUPPLY X100#3 X101#6

EMG STOP BTN1 N334#2 X02#2 EMG STOP BTN2 N334#6 X02#6 EMG STOP BTN3 N334#7 X02#7 PMC RUN R9015#1 F00#6 SAFETY ALARM M337#7 F00#7

Emergency stop signal status

FL-NET EMG STOP M348#0 F01#0


- 158 -

7.22.3 TR SAFETY I/O STATUS DISPLAY The TR safety I/O status screen shows the status of the FL-net safety function and the status of safety-related signals shared among the stations of a transfer machine using the FL-net safety function. This screen is included in the operator's panel only when the FL-net safety function is used. (For the FL-net safety function, refer to "Series 18i-LNB Connection Manual (Hardware)" B-63933EN.) A screen as shown below can be created simply by setting in FPAssist the placement of stations (nodes) and the names of safety signals used for communication through FL-net. Signal addresses are assigned automatically, so you need not set them. FL-NET STATE SIGNL fields are lit when FL-net communication is performed normally. If a node is separated from FL-net for a reason such as a communication error, the corresponding field is off. FL-NET SAFETY NODE fields indicate whether to participate in the FL-net safety function. The field indication follows the settings of the destination node bit parameters (Nos. 13862 to 13865, 13876 to 13879) of the FL-net safety function. The fields for nodes that participate in the FL-net safety function are lit, and the fields for those that do not participate are off. SAFETY ALARM SIGNL fields are lit red when the FL-net safety function detects an abnormality. Signal fields (0 to 6) show the status of the signals of each node.


- 159 -

7.22.4 Safety IO Status Display Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/2)

N2 : Set 0 when the CNC system is a single-path system or a

single-CPU, two-path system. Set 1 when the CNC system is a two-CPU, two-path system.

N1 : Set a mode. Set 1 for a connector used with the safety I/O unit. Set 0 for a connector not used with the safety I/O unit.

S14_1 : Set the equipment code of the signal connected to a connector, by using an alphanumeric character string not longer than 14 half-size characters. For the CNA8-1, CNA8-2, and CNA8-3, use an alphanumeric character string not longer than 13 half-size characters.

S14_2 : Set the name of the signal connected to a connector, by using an alphanumeric character string not longer than 14 half-size characters. The following character strings are set initially. For the CNA8, use an alphanumeric character string not longer than 10 half-size characters.

Initially set character strings

[Safety I/O Status screen １／１]2 Screen name:

10 NEED

CNC system(Single path or 1CPU2path=0, 2CPU2path=1) N2

Connector ConnectorNo. Equipment Code Signal Name No. Equipment Code Signal Name

CNA1 N1 S14_1 S14_2 CNB1 N1 S14_1 S14_2CNA2 N1 S14_1 S14_2 CNB2 N1 S14_1 S14_2CNA3 N1 S14_1 S14_2 CNB3 N1 S14_1 S14_2CNA4 N1 S14_1 S14_2 CNB4 N1 S14_1 S14_2CNA5 N1 S14_1 S14_2 CNB5 N1 S14_1 S14_2CNA6 N1 S14_1 S14_2 CNB6 N1 S14_1 S14_2CNA7 N1 S14_1 S14_2 CNB7 N1 S14_1 S14_2CNA8 S14_2 CNB8 N1 S14_1 S14_2

CNA8-1 N1 S14_1 S14_2 CNB9-1 N1 S14_1 S14_2CNA8-2 N1 S14_1 S14_2 CNB9-2 N1 S14_1 S14_2CNA8-3 N1 S14_1 S14_2CNA9 N1 S14_1 S14_2CNA10 N1 S14_1 S14_2

Title Mode TitleMode

CHECK

Connector Title Connector TitleNo. Signal Name No. Signal Name

CNA1 DOOR LOCK 1 CNB1 POWER SUPPLY1CNA2 LIGHT CURTAIN1 CNB2 POWER SUPPLY2CNA3 EMG STOP BTN 2 CNB3 POWER SUPPLY3CNA4 DOOR LOCK 2 CNB4 DOOR SWITCH1CNA5 LIGHT CURTAIN2 CNB5 DOOR SWITCH2CNA6 EMG STOP BTN 3 CNB6 DOOR SWITCH3CNA7 DOOR LOCK 3 CNB7 SV. PWR SUPPLYCNA8 OP. PANEL CNB8 MPG ENABLE

CNA8-1 EMG STOP BTN 1 CNB9-1 SERVO BRAKE1CNA8-2 MASTER ON BTN1 CNB9-2 SERVO BRAKE2CNA8-3 OP. POWER ONCNA9 MASTER ON BTN2CNA10 DOOR LOCK 4


- 160 -

[Built-in safety logic status screen setting – Setting table 1/2]

Setting table Setting table

S16_1 : Set the equipment code of a magnetic contactor for operation

preparation, power supply, or servo power supply, by using a character string not longer than 16 half-size characters.

S16_2 : Set the name of a signal related to operation preparation, power supply, or servo power supply, by using a character string not longer than 16 half-size characters.

The signal names indicated in the setting example shown in the right table above are initially set but can be changed freely.

N3 : For a two-path system with two CPUs, set 1. If 0 is set, item 5 will not appear on the screen.

N4 : When using the FL-net safety function, set 1. If 0 is set, the FL-net emergency stop signal status will not appear on the screen.

TitleNo. Device Code Signal Name Mode

S16_1 S16_2S16_2

1 S16_2S16_2S16_2

S16_1 S16_22 S16_2

S16_2S16_1 S16_2

3 S16_2S16_2

S16_1 S16_24 S16_2

S16_25 S16_1 S16_2 N3

S16_2S16_1 S16_2

S16_26 S16_2

S16_2S16_2S16_2 N4

Operation preparation circuit

Power supply circuit 1

Power supply circuit 2

Servo power supply (path 1)

Servo power supply (path 2)

Emergency stop signals

TitleNo. Device Code Signal Name Mode

M1CR1M MASTER ON BTNMASTER ON COND.

1 EMG STOP COND.OFF CHECKMASTER ON

M1CR2M POWER DOWN COND.2 OFF CHECK

POWER SUPPLYM1CR12M POWER DOWN COND.

3 OFF CHECKPOWER SUPPLY

1SSW1 EMG STOP FOR CNC4 OFF CHECK

SERVO PWR SUPPLY5 M1SSW2 OFF CHECK 0

SERVO PWR SUPPLY 0EMG STOP SIGNALS EMG STOP BTN1

EMG STOP BTN26 EMG STOP BTN3

PMC RUNSAFETY ALARMFL-NET EMG STOP


- 161 -

7.22.5 Safety IO Status Display Screen Setting – Setting Table (2/2) When a transfer machine uses the FL-net safety function, a screen for displaying the status of safety signals of all nodes is created by making appropriate settings on this page.

[TR Safety I/O Status screen – Setting table 2/2] N5 : When creating the TR safety I/O status screen, set 1. If 0 is set,

the TR safety I/O status screen is not created. N6 : Local node number. Set the number of a node (FL-net node)

in which the screen to be created is installed. On the screen, the node corresponding to the node number set here is indicated in blue.

S1_1 : LR specification. Use one half-size character. Normally, set L or R. The character set here appears at the beginning of the nodes displayed in the upper half of the screen.

S1_2 : LR specification. Use one half-size character. Normally, set L or R. The character set here appears at the beginning of the nodes displayed in the lower half of the screen.

S1_1

S1_2N6

[TR Safety I/O Status screen 2/2]Screen name: SAFETY

1NEED

Set up TR Safety I/O Status screen (1:Yes 0:No) N5

My node number N6Page1 No. Node No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

S1_1 Node No. N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 1 ST No. + L/RSide L/R ST No. N8 N8 N8 N8 N8 N8 N8 N8 2 FL-net state signal A1 N0345.1 N0345.2 N0345.3 N0345.4 N0345.5 N0345.6

S1_2 Node No. N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 3 FL-net safety node A M470.1 M470.2 M470.3 M470.4 M470.5 M470.6 M470.74 B M504.1 M504.2 M504.3 M504.4 M504.5 M504.6 M504.7

Page2 5 FL-net safety data signal addres A M440 M441 M442 M443 M444 M445 M446Node No. N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 6 B M474 M475 M476 M477 M478 M479 M480

ST No. N8 N8 N8 N8 N8 N8 N8 N8Node No. N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 No. Node No. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

1 ST No. + L/RPage3 2 FL-net state signal N0346.0 N0346.1 N0346.2 N0346.3 N0346.4 N0346.5 N0346.6

Node No. N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 3 FL-net safety node A M471.1 M471.2 M471.3 M471.4 M471.5 M471.6 M471.7ST No. N8 N8 N8 N8 N8 N8 N8 N8 4 B M505.1 M505.2 M505.3 M505.4 M505.5 M505.6 M505.7

Node No. N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 5 FL-net safety data signal addres A M448 M449 M450 M451 M452 M453 M4546 B M482 M483 M484 M485 M486 M487 M488

Page4Node No. N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 No. Node No. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

ST No. N8 N8 N8 N8 N8 N8 1 ST No. + L/RNode No. N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 N7 2 FL-net state signal N0347.0 N0347.1 N0347.2 N0347.3 N0347.4 N0347.5 N0347.6

3 FL-net safety node A M472.1 M472.2 M472.3 M472.4 M472.5 M472.6 M472.7Bit Signal Name 4 B M506.1 M506.2 M506.3 M506.4 M506.5 M506.6 M506.70 S18 5 FL-net safety data signal addres A M456 M457 M458 M459 M460 M461 M4621 S18 6 B M490 M491 M492 M493 M494 M495 M4962 S183 S18 No. Node No. 25 26 27 28 29 304 S18 1 ST No. + L/R5 S18 2 FL-net state signal N0348.0 N0348.1 N0348.2 N0348.3 N0348.4 N0348.56 S18 3 FL-net safety node A M473.1 M473.2 M473.3 M473.4 M473.5 M473.6

4 B M507.1 M507.2 M507.3 M507.4 M507.5 M507.65 FL-net safety data signal addres A M464 M465 M466 M467 M468 M4696 B M498 M499 M500 M501 M502 M503


- 162 -

N7 : Node number. Set the node numbers of FL-net according to the placement of the stations of the transfer machine. Nodes with node numbers 1 to 30 can use the FL-net safety function. A number beyond this range cannot be set.

N8 : Station number. Set a station number with a one- or two-digit number according to the placement of the stations of the transfer machine.

The layout of the screen is created according to the settings in N7 and N8.

S18 : Signal name. When the FL-net safety function is used, seven safety bit signals can be transmitted from each node. Set the name of an assigned signal, by using up to 18 half-size characters. This name will appear on the screen.

The signal names listed below are initially set, and they can be changed according to the actual application. Bit 0, however, is always assigned to the emergency stop signal. This bit cannot be assigned to another signal.

A1 : Signal address for displaying the FL-net communication

status. To display FL-net node list information in the FL-NET

STATE SIGNL column on this screen, set the bit address at which information on node 1 is stored, based on the R address set in an FL-net parameter, participating node information address (Pa21).

For example, if R4000 is set in FL-net parameter Pa21, set R4000.1 here.

FL-NET STATE SIGNL on the TR safety I/O status screen shows information corresponding to the nodes for which a value is set as the node number in N7 among the participating node list information written in the area starting at the address set here.

Nodes participating in the FL-net network are indicated in green, and nodes separated from the network are indicated in black.

Signal name

Bit Signal Name0 EMG STOP SIGNAL1 PWR SUPPLY COND.12 PWR SUPPLY COND.23456


- 163 -

7.23 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCREEN The periodic maintenance screen is used to count the lives of consumables to be replaced periodically and thus manage the time of replacement and arrival of the lives of those consumables. The lives of up to ten items can be counted. When the life of an item is to be used up very soon or is just used up, a signal is sent to the PMC for notification. The periodic maintenance screen is available with FPAssist Version 5.30 and later and can be incorporated when the Series 18i-LNB is used.


Description of operation (1) Before performing setting operations on the screen, turn off the

periodic maintenance operation interlock signal. (2) To incorporate settings made with FPAssist as initial values, select

the desired setting items by using the selection buttons PARTS NAME, LIFE, and COUNT TYPE on the title line of the screen. (Multiple items can be selected.). Then, press the SETTING INITIAL VALUE button. The FPAssist settings of the selected items are registered in the CNC at a time.

(3) For each maintenance item, set LIFE (in hours) and COUNT TYPE. The number indication field is a popup ten-key pad. So, touch desired numbers for setting.

(4) To select an item for which counting down from its life is to be started, touch the number in the NO. column then press the CHANGE PART button. This operation presets the life of the selected item in REMAINING LIFE and starts count-down operation. Only one item selection button can be selected at a time. To start counting down for multiple items, repeat the operation above.


- 164 -

(5) Even during count-down operation for an item, the values of REMAINING LIFE and LIFE can be changed. Use the modification method described in (2) above.

RESET LIFE WARNING button At power-up time or during count-down operation, the operator's panel outputs a life warning signal when any of the items for which count-down operation is being performed has reached a warning level (state where its remaining life has decreased to the ratio set with CNC parameter No. 8911 or below) or has used up its life. Use this button to stop the output of this signal. However, when an additional item has reached its warning level or life, the life warning signal is out again. This operation is irrelevant to the periodic maintenance operation interlock signal.

CAUTION This reset button does not turn off the output signal

F93.0 output by the CNC.

Display item Description NO. 1-10

Button for selecting an item for which count-down operation is to be started from the life. A selected item is preset to the life registered with the SELECTION ITEM CHANGE button.

STATUS Displays the count status of an item. One of the following three statuses is displayed: COUNT STOPPED: Item for which the count type is NO COUNT. Count operation is stopped. COUNTING: Item for which the count type is other than NO COUNT and count operation

is in progress "LIFE REACHED": Item which has reached its life and for which the time in excess of the life is

being counted PARTS NAME Displays a maintenance parts name set with FPAssist.

At the time of initial setting, the title line functions as a button for selecting the initialization of this item.

REMAINING LIFE Indicates the remaining life of a maintenance part (in hours). This item can also be preset to a desired time. When the remaining life of a part is decreased to the ratio set with parameter No. 8911 or less, the background color changes to red and the life warning signal is output. When the life is then reached, the indication changes to an up-counter value indicating an elapsed time as a minus value with the red background color unchanged.

LIFE Indicates the life of a maintenance part (in hours). This item can be preset to a desired time. When the life of a maintenance part is reached, the background color changes to red and the life warning signal is output. At the time of initialization, the title line functions as a button for selecting the initialization of this item.

COUNT TYPE Select a maintenance part life count type from the following six types: 0:NO COUNT, 1:ALL TIME, 2:POWER-ON TIME, 3:OPERATING TIME, 4:CUTTING TIME, 5:POWER-OFF TIME Set 0 as the count type of an item not set. At the time of initialization, the title line functions as a button for selecting the initialization of this item.

CHANGE PART Button for presetting the lives of maintenance parts selected in NO. 1 to 10 to indicated life values RESET LIFE WARNING

Button for resetting the signal used with the periodic maintenance function to post a warning and life expiration to the PMC

SETTING INITIAL VALUE

Button for incorporating initial values set with FPAssist for an display item selected with the title for the item


- 165 -

7.23.2 Periodic Maintenance Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1)

A1_1 : Set the signal for interlocking periodic maintenance screen

operation. A1_2 : Signal for notifying the PMC that the life of an item is to be

used up very soon or is just used up. Set this output signal as an automatic screen switch signal for the periodic maintenance screen. This signal can be turned off with the RESET LIFE WARNING button on the screen. Each time a life warning is output for an additional part, this signal is output.

S24 : Set a periodic maintenance part name by using a character string not longer than 24 half-size characters.

N1 : Set a life. Range: 0-65535 (in hours) N2 : Set a count type for each periodic maintenance part.

CHECK

[Periodic maintenance screen 1/1]17Screen name:

-10 OK

Setting periodic maintenance partsScreen interlock signal A1_1Life warning signal A1_2

No. Parts name Life Count type1 S24 N1 N22 S24 N1 N23 S24 N1 N24 S24 N1 N25 S24 N1 N26 S24 N1 N27 S24 N1 N28 S24 N1 N29 S24 N1 N2

10 S24 N1 N2

COUNT TYPE 0:NO COUNT 1:ALL TIME 2:POWER-ON TIME3:OPERATION TIME4:CUTTING TIME 5:POWER-OFF TIME


- 166 -

7.24 αi MOTOR TEMPERATURE MONITOR SCREEN When a spindle or servo motor of the αi series is used, the current temperature of the winding of the motor and the stoppage of the fan of the motor or amplifier can be monitored on this maintenance screen. A function for outputting a warning before a motor overheat alarm is issued is provided. So, an abnormal motor temperature can be detected at an earlier stage without stopping the current machining due to an alarm. The function for detecting abnormalities such as an abnormal temperature notifies the PMC with the warning notification output signal when the current temperature of a spindle or servo motor has reached the warning temperature set in the sheet or the alarm level, or when the stoppage of a fan is detected. This signal can be specified as a signal for automatic screen switching. The αi motor temperature monitor screen is available with FPAssist Version 5.30 and later and can be incorporated when the Series 18i-LNB is used.


Display item/parts Description

Motor name A spindle name or servo axis name not longer than 4 half-size characters set in the sheet is displayed.

Alarm level temperature (bar graph)

A bar graph for indicating an alarm level temperature is displayed in the background at the top of the meter scale. An alarm level temperature and higher temperatures are indicated in red, and temperatures below the alarm level are indicated in blue. For a spindle, the value of parameter No. 4134 is indicated. For a servo axis, a temperature set in the sheet is indicated.

WARNING (numeric temperature indication)

A warning temperature set in the sheet is indicated as a numeric value. When the current temperature has increased to a warning temperature or higher, the background of the numeric indication field is turned on in yellow, and the warning notification signal and temperature alarm signal are output. This warning temperature can be modified by touching the numeric value indication field.


- 167 -

Display item/parts Description CURRENT motor temperature (numeric temperature indication)

The current temperature of the winding of a motor is indicated. When an alarm level temperature set in the sheet is reached or exceeded for a servo axis, or when the temperature set in parameter No. 4134 is reached or exceeded for a spindle, the background of the numeric indication field is turned on in red, and the warning notification signal and temperature alarm signal are output.

CURRENT motor temperature (meter indication)

The current temperature of the winding of a motor is displayed by means of meter indication.

Fan stop notification (lamp)

When an internal cooling fan for a motor axis, radiator cooling fan, or converter cooling fan/radiator cooling fan stops, this lamp is turned on, and the motor warning notification signal and temperature alarm signal are output.

SETTING INITIAL VALUE (button)

Button used to incorporate a warning temperature set in the sheet into the operator's panel. Use this button when an αi motor temperature monitor screen is created for the first time on the machine operator's panel or when the warning value is to be returned to a value in the sheet.

WARNING RESET (button)

When the operator confirms the output of a temperature-/fan-related warning, the operator can stop the output related to the warning notification signal by pressing this button.

Signal name Description

Motor warning notification signal (output)

When the current temperature of a spindle or servo axis has increased to the warning temperature or higher, or the alarm level or higher, or when a fan stops abnormally, this notification signal is output to the PMC. This signal can be specified as a screen switch signal from the PMC. When the operator presses the WARNING RESET button, the output of this signal is stopped. When an additional warning is output later, this signal is output again. This common signal is used even when a two-path system is used.

Temperature alarm signal (output)

When the warning notification signal is output, this signal indicates whether the temperature warning represents an abnormal temperature relative to a warning temperature level or alarm level temperature. When an abnormal temperature relative to an alarm level temperature occurs with any one of the spindle and servo axes, the temperature alarm signal indicates an abnormal temperature relative to the alarm level temperature.

Temperature state Motor

warning notification

signal

Temperature alarm

signal Description of signal state

Normal temperature 0 0 Indicates that the temperatures of all of the spindle and servo axes are below the warning temperatures.

Warning temperature level reached or fan stopped

1 0

Notifies that the temperature of at least one of the spindle and servo axes is equal to or greater than the warning temperature but is less than the alarm level temperature. Alternatively, the stoppage of the fan of an axis was detected.

Alarm level temperature reached 1 1

Notifies that the temperature of at least one of the spindle and servo axes is equal to or greater than the alarm level temperature.

(Undefined) 0 1 The meaning of this signal state is undefined.

CAUTION 1 When a FANUC-manufactured spindle of a type older than the ai spindle is used,

neither its temperature nor the stoppage of a fan can be monitored. 2 When a configured spindle system consists of different types of spindles including a

FANUC-manufactured spindle of a type older than the αi spindle, neither its temperature nor the stoppage of a fan can be monitored.


- 168 -

7.24.2 αi Motor Temperature Monitor Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1)

N1_1 : Set 1 when a two-path system is used, and the motor

temperatures of the axes of path 2 are to be monitored. Set 0 when a single-path system is used or when the motor temperatures of the axes of path 2 in a two-path system are not to be monitored.

S4 : Set the name of each of the spindles and servo axes for each path. A name set here is used on the motor temperature monitor screen. Set an axis name not longer than 4 half-size characters or 2 full-size characters.

N1_2 : Set a motor type by using the number 0, 1, or 2. The motor temperature monitor screen is enabled only when a motor of the αi series is used. So, a motor type needs to be set. When a motor of the αi series is used, set N3_1 and N3_2 as well.

0: No motor axis is used, or a motor not manufactured by FANUC is used.

1: A motor of the αi series manufactured by FANUC is used. 2: A motor other than the ai series manufactured by FANUC is

used. N3_1 : Set an alarm level temperature for a servo motor. By default,

140°C is set. Usually, this default value need not be changed. The alarm level temperature of a spindle motor varies from one

motor type to another. So, the temperature set in the CNC parameter is employed.

N3_2 : Set a warning motor temperature. By using a minus value, specify a temperature width by which the alarm level temperature needs to be reduced in order to set a warning temperature. By default, -10°C is set. So, for servo motors, the default warning temperature is 130°C. For spindle motors, the alarm level temperature less than this temperature setting specified by the CNC parameter is the warning temperature. Usually, the default value need not be changed.

A1_1 : Specify a warning notification signal bit to be posted to the PMC when an abnormal temperature is detected.

A1_2 : Specify a temperature alarm signal bit to be posted to the PMC to indicate what is a temperature alarm when an abnormal temperature is detected.

[Alpha-i motor temperature monitor screen 1/1]18 Screen name:

-10 OK

Set if you create 2nd PATH screens.(0: No 2nd PATH screens, 1:Create 2nd PATH screens) N1_1Path1 axis Temperature Path2 axis Temperature

name Alpha-i motor Alarm level Warning name Alpha-i motor Alarm level Warning1st spindle S4 N1_2 PRM.4134 N3_2 S4 N1_2 PRM.4134 N3_22nd spindle S4 N1_2 PRM.4134 N3_2 S4 N1_2 PRM.4134 N3_2

1st axis S4 N1_2 N3_1 N3_2 S4 N1_2 N3_1 N3_22nd axis S4 N1_2 N3_1 N3_2 S4 N1_2 N3_1 N3_23rd axis S4 N1_2 N3_1 N3_2 S4 N1_2 N3_1 N3_24th axis S4 N1_2 N3_1 N3_2 S4 N1_2 N3_1 N3_25th axis S4 N1_2 N3_1 N3_2 S4 N1_2 N3_1 N3_26th axis S4 N1_2 N3_1 N3_2 S4 N1_2 N3_1 N3_27th axis S4 N1_2 N3_1 N3_28th axis S4 N1_2 N3_1 N3_2

Warning signal A1_1Temperature alarm signal A1_2

B-66254EN/05 8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

- 169 -

8 MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL This chapter explains the multi-language batch input tool, which is used to set multi-language captions for the multi-language display function available with FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist EDITION 6.00 (FPAssist Version 6.01) and later. The batch input tool allows all multi-language captions in all forms in a project to be listed in data sheets and set at a time. After caption setting, data is written for all multi-language captions in each form at a time by using the write button, and for the language set as the output language of FPAssist, the caption data is reflected in FPAssist. Use of this tool will largely reduce the multi-language setting operation and the project re-creation operation from a conventional single language project to a multi-language project.

8.MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL B-66254EN/05

- 170 -

8.1 ENVIRONMENT, CONDITIONS, AND SETTING OF THE MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

Environment and conditions of the multi-language batch input tool

To use the multi-language batch input tool, the customer must set up the following environment and conditions:

Environment/conditions Supplementary Microsoft Excel2000 Service release 3 is required in addition to

Excel2000. Necessary conditions requested by Microsoft to operate Excel2000

Conditions of OS, computer unit, memory, hard disk, display, disk device, and so on are defined.

Conditions of the FPAssist tool

The multi-language batch input tool runs on Excel2000. FPAssist that supports the multi-language display function is FPAssist for Excel2000. Therefore, for new projects, screen development in Excel2000 must be selected. When an existing project was developed with FPAssist for Excel95, version upgrading to FPAssist for Excel2000 must be performed before the multi-language display function can be used for the project. For how to perform upgrading to FPAssist for Excel2000, see Section 4.1, "ACTIVATING FANUC PICTURE", and Subsection 4.3.10, "Assistant V-UP". After changing to the operating environment of FPAssist for Excel2000, use the Assistant V-UP button to upgrade the version. Then, the multi-language display function and batch input tool will become available. Before FPAssist for Excel2000 can be used, the installed FANUC PICTURE &FPAssist software must be able to use FPAssist for Excel2000. If it cannot use FPAssist for Excel2000, follow the procedures described in Section 3.3, "UNINSTALLING FANUC PICTURE &FPAssist", and Section 3.2, "INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE &FPAssist", to make FPAssist for Excel2000 usable.


- 171 -

8.2 OPERATIONS OF THE MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

Before the multi-language batch input tool can be started, "The Multi-language display function is used" must be checked in setting of a custom screen development project. The language keys of the output languages (Japanese, English, Polish and Chinese) provided by FPAssist are already registered. You can modify the language key data of the four languages but cannot delete it. To add a language besides the four languages, register a language key of the language. Language data is stored in files in a subfolder created under the name FPBatchInput in a project folder. Multi-language batch input work sheets are created under the name "project-name_MLT.XLS" in FPBatchInput. When the project name is TEST, for example, the work sheet is named TEST_MLT.xls. You may start the multi-language batch input tool by dragging and dropping a multi-language batch input work sheet, TEST_MLT.XLS in the above example, to the Excel2000 icon or by selecting [Files] - [Open] after Excel2000 starts and directly opening TEST_MLT.xls besides using the start menu button.

CAUTION 1 The multi-language batch input tool determines

whether to update multi-language setting sheets by the date of update made by custom screen editing. So, set the calendar timer of the personal computer correctly.

2 While the multi-language batch input tool is operating, do not modify any FANUC PICTURE edit project. To modify an edit project, end the batch input tool, then modify the project by using the [Open Project] menu.

3 While the multi-language batch input tool is operating, do not modify FPAssist. To perform the write function of the batch tool, end FPAssist. Therefore, one, but only one, of the multi-language batch tool and FPAssist can be activated.

4 Flow diagnostic messages for multi-language display can be created by using FPAssist. (Output languages are limited to three languages.) For details, see Appendix C.3, "CREATING FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES FOR MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY".


- 172 -

8.2.1 Project Screen List Sheet As the multi-language batch tool has started, the sheet named MLT_LIST shown below is displayed. A certain time is required to display the project screen sheet (MLT_LIST sheet) because form names in a project and file information must be read and the project screen sheet must be created. The screen list sheet consists of a list of FPAssist forms created by FPAssist and a list of user forms created using ANUC PICTURE. The FPAssist screen sheet list is a list of function screens created by FPAssist. The user creation (main) and user creation (sub) functions of FPAssist are indicated in the form screen sheet list. The form screen sheet list shows a list of the names of FPAssist user creation (main) and user creation (sub) function forms and forms created with FPAssist, as well as user forms added to vbp files.

Button/display item Description Read button This button is used to read the controls of screen names selected in the screen

name select check box for which multi-language caption setting is required and to create a multi-language caption setting sheet for each screen. When the "No use multi-language" property is checked for the control of a user form, the control is not read.

Write button This button is used to write captions set in multi-language caption setting sheets corresponding to the screen names selected in the screen name select check box into the multi-language property of the control of each form.

Delete button This button is used to delete multi-language caption setting sheets selected in the screen name select check box. Only sheets are deleted, and the custom screen form of the project is not deleted.

Option button This button is explained in detail in Subsection 8.2.4, " Multi-Language Display of a Project with Single-Language User Forms".


- 173 -

Button/display item Description ALL CHECK button A multi-language caption setting sheet created for each screen has a function button

for checking whether set characters can be displayed by the display character type in each control. The ALL CHECK button provides an equivalent function to pressing the check buttons on all sheets. When a response with cancel is made to an error notification dialog box displayed during checking, the checked form is placed in the warning state, and checking proceeds to the next form.

Update button When the batch input tool is started after creation of a multi-language batch sheet, "FPAssist screen sheet list” is re-created by obtaining FPAssist screen sheet information again, which indicates whether screens have been added or deleted (screen sheets have been changed) with FPAssist. When you have made an addition, deletion, or other change to the language keys during setting of a project and multi-language items in FANUC PICTURE, use this button to create a new listing in the multi-language caption setting sheet to reflect a multi-language key you have added, deleted, or renamed by the editing. All items including captions in the table are not read by using this button. The captions and others are read at the next processing stage by using the Read button.

Version button This button displays the software version of the multi-language batch input tool. For inquiries to the multi-language batch input tool, please let us know also this version number.

Select Check box All select/ All cancel

This item is used to check or uncheck the check boxes of all screen names created in a project.

Select Check box (for each created screen)

These check boxes are checked to select target screen names for the functions of the Read, Write, and Delete buttons.

System name A project name is indicated. A taken in Screen Name The names of screens of which form data has already been included in the

multi-language caption setting sheet by the Read button are indicated. When the time stamp of a screen name at the time of the inclusion in the sheet differs from the time stamp of the screen name of the current project, the background color becomes magenta to indicate the possibility that editing may have been performed with VB. Check whether to include the screen name to the sheet again or not.

The present Screen Name When the batch input sheet is opened or when the read button in multi-language setting is pressed, the screen names created in the project at that point of time are indicated. When the time stamp of a screen name at the time of the inclusion in the sheet differs from the time stamp of the screen name of the current project, the background color becomes magenta to indicate the possibility that editing may have been performed with VB.

Function Name Function names registered in FPAssist are indicated.


- 174 -

8.2.2 Adding a Multi-Language Caption Setting Sheet Among the screen names listed in the FPAssist screen sheet list or form screen list, select screen names for which multi-language caption setting is to be performed by checking their select check boxes. To read all the listed screens, check All Select. Then, press the Read button. Multi-language caption setting sheets having the same names as form names are created. To open the sheet of a form, click a blue screen name in A taken in Screen Name. A jump to the multi-language caption setting sheet of the selected screen is then made.


- 175 -

8.2.3 Explanation of Displayed Multi-Language Caption Setting Sheet Functions

When a read operation is performed, caption setting sheets are created. Multi-language caption sheets have a caption setting table for the language keys registered in setting of the project. The left figure <1> shows an FPAssist multi-language setting sheet and the right figure <2> shows a user screen multi-language setting sheet of a user form when a read operation, which is an FPAssist operation function, is performed.

<1> FPAssist multi-language setting sheet <2> User screen multi-language setting sheet

Button/display item Description

CHECK button This button checks whether the characters of multi-language captions set in a form can be displayed by the display character type for each control.

NEED / OK / WARNING / ERROR Status

The result of the character check made by the CHECK button for the set captions is indicated. For details, see Section 8.4, "CHECKING DATA SETTINGS".

<< , >> buttons These buttons are used to jump to the beginning of a table created for a control type. n/m (1/2 in the example in <2>)

The current position is indicated for a jump to the beginning of a table created for a control type.

Undo button This button is used to restore a selected cell width for caption setting to its original width.Shorten, Widen Button These buttons are used to shorten or widen a selected cell width for caption setting.

These buttons can be used to see long captions. ObjectID indication Symbol

An object ID assigned to each control edited with VB is indicated. From this ID, the location of a control in the form can be identified.

Property indication A caption property name is indicated. From this name, whether a setting item is an OnCaption setting item or OffCaption setting item of a lamp and so on can be identified.

Language key indication In the sample figure, language keys such as "JPN" and "ENG" are found in the language key indication area. The language keys registered for a project are displayed horizontally. In the columns of these language key indications, settings for languages are made.

(Multi-language caption setting field)

In white cells in the table, multi-language captions are set. Set captions in individual languages.

Title following ■ The type of a control or FPAssist item name is indicated.


- 176 -

8.2.4 Multi-Language Display of a Project with Single-Language User Forms

This subsection explains how to allow multi-language display using project data of a user form created with the FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist product earlier than Edition 6.00. If such data is read into a multi-language batch setting sheet without performing the operation described below, captions are not set in the setting sheet. Also data in the setting sheet cannot be set in forms by a write operation. Screen forms automatically created by FPAssist conversion, however, can support multi-language display if version upgrading to multi-language FPAssist is performed, and conversion and screen re-creation is performed. So, when there is no user form, the operation described below is unnecessary. <1> Setting of project - Setting of Multi-language Check "The Multi-language display function is used.". The

language keys of the output languages (Japanese, English, and Polish) of FPAssist are already registered. Language key data may be changed if necessary, but these keys cannot be deleted. To add another language besides the three languages, register a language key.

<2> Start the multi-language batch tool. <3> Press the Option button in the project screen list sheet. <4> Settings in the option setup dialog box Check "It assigns the language which specified Caption used

now.", and from the combo box, select a language key for which the current caption is to be set. Select a language key set as the output language of FPAssist.

<5> Press the OK button. For all forms present in the project, the current caption is set as a

caption for the selected language key.


- 177 -

CAUTION 1 The forms to be processed are not related to the

select check box in the project screen sheet. The forms output in the project folder are processed.

2 Each time the OK button is pressed, a write operation is performed. Therefore, note that the caption set for a language key is overwritten by the second and subsequent write operations. When this write operation is performed while an English caption is displayed during editing on VB, for example, the English caption is set for the written language key, which indicates Japanese. As a result, the previously set Japanese caption is overwritten and lost.

3 If a language key different from the FPAssist output language is selected, the language caption already set on a screen that was created automatically by conversion of FPAssist is overwritten by the caption of the different language.

<6> Reading of forms on the project screen sheet Check the all screen select check box, and create multi-language

caption setting sheets for forms. For details, see Subsection 8.2.2, "Adding a Multi-Language

Caption Setting Sheet". <7> Multi-language caption setting and write to forms Subsequently, set multi-language captions and write them to

forms.


- 178 -

8.3 ENTERING A MULTI-LANGUAGE CAPTION SETTING SHEET

This section explains how to set multi-language caption setting sheets. Two types of caption setting sheets, FPAssist multi-language setting sheets and user screen multi-language setting sheets, are provided, and captions are set in an appropriate form for each custom screen.

8.3.1 FPAssist Multi-Language Setting Sheet A FPAssist multi-language setting sheet is created for each function. A caption setting table for all forms (the maximum number of pages) created by a function is displayed. The caption setting table of FPAssist is created in a state close to the FPAssist function settings. The left figure shows the manual operation screen of FPAssist, and the right figure shows the caption sheet of the manual operation screen of the batch tool. The maximum number of characters that make up a caption is the same as the number of characters indicated by FPAssist.

There is a caption setting table for an item not found in the FPAssist function setting table. This setting table sets captions in three languages output by FPAssist. This setting table is provided for each control type. In the title field indicated with ■ a control name is shown. The maximum number of characters that make up a caption in each setting table is determined by the character type and control width. (The number of characters is applied on the assumption that the X and Y coordinate values of characters is 0.)


- 179 -

8.3.1.1 Cell division in a FPAssist caption setting table In some caption setting tables, captions are divided into cells. This is to follow the FPAssist setting table, and is used to change lines. A line feed code " \n" may be entered in a cell. In this case, line feed code "\n" is counted as one character.

Let us compare the sheets presented in Subsection 8.3.1, "FPAssist Multi-Language Setting Sheet". While the manual operation screen sheet of FPAssist has four cells, the caption setting table of the batch tool has two cells. The batch tool provides two cells because the cells that can be used on the actual operator's panel screen are only the left two cells.

8.3.1.2 Entry not permitted in an FPAssist caption setting table FPAssist caption setting tables may contain cells with yellow background indication, which disable data entry. Such a cell appears when a control is set so that it is not used or when no form has been created.

When a setting table is divided LMP01 PC RUN LMP02 AIR LMP03 COOLANT

:

When a form is output “PC\nRUN” “AIR” “\nCOOLANT” “”


- 180 -

8.3.2 User Screen Multi-Language Setting Sheet The following shows a caption setting table on a user screen multi-language setting sheet:

A user screen setting sheet is created for each form. A caption setting table is created for each type of control. Even when a control has a caption created in a form, no caption setting table is created for the control if a setting is made to disable display or when the property "No use multi-language" (see Section 8.6) is selected. In the user screen setting table, line feed code "\n" is not counted as a character when it is entered. The maximum number of characters that make up a control is calculated from the character type and control width. (The number of characters is applied on the assumption that the X and Y coordinate values of characters is 0.)


- 181 -

8.4 CHECKING DATA SETTINGS Batch sheets have a CHECK button. After setting multi-language data, you can check the data set for a sheet for possible error by using the CHECK. By using the ALL CHECK button on the MLT_LIST sheet, you can check all the batch sheets.

8.4.1 NEED When a batch sheet is edited, need for checking is indicated in the sheet. When a sheet needs checking, the write function cannot be used.

8.4.2 ERROR If invalid data is found during data entry into an FPAssist multi-language setting sheet, a warning dialog box appears. If the warning dialog box is ignored, and a character check is attempted using the CHECK button without correcting the data, an error indication appears. "ERROR" indicates that the number of characters that can be displayed is exceeded or that an illegal character is included. The number of characters that can be displayed is checked on the assumption that the X and Y coordinate values are both set to 0. If an error is indicated, you cannot write multi-language captions into a form. So, be sure to set correct data so that OK appears.

8.4.3 WARNING If invalid data is found during data entry into a user screen multi-language setting sheet, a warning dialog box appears. If the warning dialog box is ignored, and a character check is attempted using the CHECK button without correcting the data, a warning indication appears. "WARNING" indicates that the number of characters that can be displayed is exceeded or that an illegal character is included. The number of characters that can be displayed is checked on the assumption that the X and Y coordinate values are both set to 0. Data on a user screen multi-language setting sheet may be written into multi-language captions on a form with this warning ignored. In this case, however, the CNC discards the excess characters when a character string is too long to display, and replaces an illegal character with a blank.

8.4.4 OK When a data check initiated by the CHECK button shows no data error, the OK state is indicated. If OK is indicated on a sheet, the write function can be used.


- 182 -

8.5 DATA REFLECTION IN FPAssist A write operation outputs data on a caption setting sheet to a form. When data on the FPAssist multi-language setting sheet is written, the data is reflected also in FPAssist. The language to be reflected is the one set as the output language of FPAssist.

FPAssist multi-language setting sheet when read

FPAssist manual operation screen sheet when read

FPAssist manual operation screen sheet after write

FPAssist multi-language setting sheet after write

Read screen form created by FPAssist conversion with output language set to 1

Edit

Write to FPAssist sheet and manual operation screen form


- 183 -

8.6 CONTROL TO BE READ IN USER FORM Use of the multi-language function for a project is specified in setting of the project. For controls of each form, a property for specifying whether to use multi-language input is provided. For example, when a control uses a label control as the background, caption setting for multi-language display is unnecessary. When controls do not set captions for labels and buttons, they need not be read into user screen multi-language setting sheets by using the batch tool. In such cases, check the "No use multi-language" property.

Even when use of the multi-language display function is specified in setting of a project, a control is not read by the batch tool if the "No use multi-language" property of the control is checked.


- 184 -

8.7 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE SCREEN SHEET LIST AND FORM DATA

The batch tool records the time of update to a read form. As a result of editing of a read user form or function, there is a discrepancy between the caption setting table and the latest form information. For this reason, the batch tool checks the time of update when the batch tool starts and when multi-language settings are read. A message is displayed to indicate that the time of update of a read sheet and that of a form differ, and the cells of the screen name or function name are displayed in magenta. For such a screen name, read the sheet again (reread).

Even when only a control color on the screen has been changed, the above warning message appears because of the difference in time of update. In such a case, you may continue setting caption data ignoring the warning. You may also perform a write operation. However, because information in the setting table and the latest form information do not match, the write function may not work correctly depending on the changes made to the screen. Generally, when a screen name is indicated in magenta, reread to a sheet should always be performed for that screen name.


- 185 -

8.7.1 Reread of an FPAssist Form FPAssist conversion automatically creates a screen form for FANUC PICTURE based on the settings in an excel sheet. The screen form created by FPAssist is called an FPAssist form. Instead of FPAssist, the edit function of FANUC PICTURE allows creation of a machine-dedicated custom screen. Screen forms created with this function are created user forms. When new FPAssist forms are read, captions in the language set as the output language for all screens of created FPAssist sheets are read into the corresponding language cells on the batch tool sheet. At this time, captions for lamps for which no ON signal is set and captions for buttons of which mode is set to 0, that is, captions for lamps and buttons that are not used, are not read. When an FPAssist form is reread, the captions that have already been read are not retrieved. When rereading is performed, newly added captions are read, and the caption setting cells for captions that have been deleted (set invalid or unused) are indicated as cells in which no input is allowed and the captions previously set are no longer contained. Note that an FPAssist form is reread as described below after the batch tool sheet is edited. The figure below shows a difference between batch tool sheet data after read of an FPAssist form and that after reread of the FPAssist form. <1> Read caption data from an FPAssist form and output the data to a

sheet. ("Unused" is set for LMP03, so it is indicated as an item that cannot be set.)

<2> Add and edit caption data. (In the example, captions are added to JPN, and data in LMP02 of ENG is cleared.)

<3> Set "Used" for LMP03 and set “Disabled” for LMP01, convert the FPAssist form, and reread caption data in the FPAssist form.


- 186 -

• When rereading is performed, the captions in the multi-language caption setting sheet that have already been read are not retrieved from FPAssist form data. However, LMP01 has been valid but now is invalid, and is indicated as an item that cannot be set in the batch tool; LMP03 has been invalid but now is valid, and its caption is read.

• Caption data in a language other than the PAssist output language is not reread.

FPAssist form Output Lng.= 1 LMP01 = “lamp1” LMP02 = “lamp2” LMP03 = “lamp3” LMP03 Unused

<1> Multi Language Tool (Sheet state after read)

ENG JPN POL LMP01 = “lamp1” LMP01 = “” LMP01 = “” LMP02 = “lamp2” LMP02 = “” LMP02 = “” LMP03 = “” LMP03 = “” LMP03 = “”

No write operation is performed with the multi-language tool.

FPAssist form Output Lng.= 1 LMP01 = “lamp1” LMP01 Unused LMP02 = “lamp2” LMP03 = “lamp3” LMP03 Used

<3> Multi Language Tool (After reread of FPassist form)

ENG JPN POL LMP01 = “” LMP01 = “” LMP01 = “” LMP02 = “lamp2” LMP02 = “ﾗﾝﾌﾟ 2” LMP02 = “” LMP03 = “lamp3” LMP03 = “” LMP03 = “”

Read

Reread

<2> Multi Language Tool (After editing of caption sheet)

ENG JPN POL LMP01 = “lamp1” LMP01 = “ﾗﾝﾌﾟ 1” LMP01 = “” LMP02 = “” LMP02 = “ﾗﾝﾌﾟ 2” LMP02 = “” LMP03 = “” LMP03 = “” LMP03 = “”


- 187 -

8.7.2 Reread of a User Form Unlike the reread operation of an FPAssist form, the reread operation of a user form re-creates the entire user screen multi-language sheet each time. Therefore, note that language data set on a user screen multi-language setting sheet is entirely discarded when a reread operation is performed. Normally, language data set with a user screen multi-language setting sheet is matched with the user form by the write operation, so there is no problem. The figure below shows a difference in data between a user screen multi-language setting sheet after a read operation and that after a reread operation. <1> Read caption data from a user form and output to a sheet.

("Unused" is set for LMP03, so it is not entered in the table.) <2> Add and edit caption data. (In the example, captions are added to

JPN, and data in LMP02 of ENG is cleared.) <3> Set "Used" for LMP03, and reread the user form.

• Unlike reading of an FPAssist form, a user form is read in all languages that have been set.

• Rereading a user form re-creates a user form table for which reading is specified, and resets all caption data in the user form, thereby overwriting the ENG caption data set in <2>.

To add the table of a new control or a control for which a change from "Unused" to "Used" was made while retaining the caption information set in <2>, perform a write operation before the reread operation to reflect the data in the user screen multi-language setting sheet in the user form. Then, perform a reread operation. This enables the table of LMP03 to be added while the data set or modified in <2> is kept intact.

User-form LMP01 = “lamp1” LMP02 = “lamp2” LMP03 = “lamp3” LMP03 Unused

<1> Multi Language Tool ENG JPN POL

LMP01 = “lamp1” LMP01 = “” LMP01 = “” LMP02 = “lamp2” LMP02 = “” LMP02 = “”

User-form LMP01 = “lamp1” LMP02 = “lamp2” LMP03 = “lamp3” LMP03 Used

<3> Multi Language Tool (After reread of user form) ENG JPN POL

LMP01 = “lamp1” LMP01 = “” LMP01 = “” LMP02 = “lamp2” LMP02 = “” LMP02 = “” LMP03 = “lamp3” LMP03 = “” LMP03 = “”

Read

Reread

<2> Multi Language Tool (after editing of user screen multi-language setting sheet)

ENG JPN POL LMP01 = “lamp1” LMP01 = “ﾗﾝﾌﾟ 1” LMP01 = “” LMP02 = “” LMP02 = “ﾗﾝﾌﾟ 2” LMP02 = “”


- 188 -

8.8 UPGRADING THE MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL

When you have upgraded the FANUC PICTURE & FPAssist package software, you should also upgrade a multi-language batch input Excel book created with an earlier version of the software. Follow the procedure below. <1> Click the Multi input menu button to open a batch input Excel

book created with an earlier version of the software. <2> Select all function name sheets and click the Write button. Write

processing starts, and then you should ensure that the processing completes successfully.

<3> End batch input with the earlier version (Exit Excel). <4> Rename the xxx_MLT.xls sheet in the FPBatchInput folder (xxx

indicates a project name). <5> Click the Multi input menu button to open a batch input Excel

book in a new version of the software. <6> A sheet is created which lists the current project items. Select all

function name sheets and click the Read button. <7> Read processing starts, and then you should ensure that the

processing completes successfully. The batch input Excel book has now been upgraded. Exit Excel to save the batch input Excel book.

APPENDIX

B-66254EN/05 APPENDIX A.DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS

- 191 -

A DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS

A.DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS APPENDIX B-66254EN/05

- 192 -

A.1 ONE-BYTE CHARACTERS The characters in the ranges 20-7F and A0-DF listed below can be displayed.

NOTE When the character of code 7F is output, the hatch

code is displayed. When the character of code A0 is output, the waveform cod is displayed.

This table is the code table based on the ESC 4 (standard character set) mode.


- 193 -

A.2 TWO-BYTE CHARACTERS

A.2.1 JIS Level 1 Among the kanji characters defined by JIS level 1, those characters that can be displayed with the C language executor are listed in the table below. The characters enclosed in parentheses in the table cannot be displayed. If an attempt is made to display such a character, a full-size blank is displayed. To the SJIS codes 885F to 889D, FANUC-specific special characters are assigned. The FANUC special characters are detailed later.


- 194 -


- 195 -


- 196 -


- 197 -


- 198 -

A.2.2 JIS Level 2 Among the kanji characters defined by JIS level 2, the characters listed below only can be displayed. If an attempt is made to display a JIS level-2 character other than the listed characters, a full-size blank is displayed.


- 199 -

A.2.3 FANUC Special Characters The table below lists the FANUC special characters assigned to JIS level-1 codes.

Number SJIS [JIS ] FANUC Character 1 885F [2F40] 752 Right arrow(→) 2 8860 [2F41] 754 Upper right arrow 3 8861 [2F42] 756 Upper arrow(↑) 4 8862 [2F43] 758 Upper left arrow 5 8863 [2F44] 075A Left arrow(←) 6 8864 [2F45] 075C Lower left arrow 7 8865 [2F46] 075E Lower arrow(↓) 8 8866 [2F47] 760 Lower right arrow 9 8867 [2F48] 762 Clockwise arrow

10 8868 [2F49] 764 Counterclockwise arrow 11 8869 [2F4A] 766 Small arc 12 886A [2F4B] 768 Large arc 13 886B [2F4C] 076A Small quadrangle 14 886F [2F50] 077C Finishing symbol 1 15 8870 [2F51] 077E Finishing symbol 2 16 8871 [2F52] 780 Finishing symbol 3 17 8872 [2F53] 782 Finishing symbol 4 18 8880 [2F60] 1240 1/1 19 8881 [2F61] 1242 2/2 20 8882 [2F62] 1244 3/3 21 8883 [2F63] 1246 4/4 22 8884 [2F64] 1248 5/5 23 8885 [2F65] 124A 6/6 24 8886 [2F66] 124C 25 8887 [2F67] 124E 26 8888 [2F68] 1250 Millimeter(mm) 27 8889 [2F69] 1252 Centimeter(cm) 28 888A [2F6A] 1254 Kilometer(km) 29 888B [2F6B] 1256 Square centimeter(cm2) 30 888C [2F6C] 1258 Square meter(m2) 31 888D [2F6D] 125A square kilometer(km2) 32 888E [2F6E] 125C Cubic centimeter(cm3) 33 888F [2F6F] 125E Cubic meter(m3) 34 8890 [2F70] 1260 Milligram(mg) 35 8891 [2F71] 1262 Kilogram(kg) 36 8892 [2F72] 1264 Cubic centimeter(cc) 37 8893 [2F73] 1266 Deciliter(dl) 38 8894 [2F74] 1268 Liter(l) 39 8895 [2F75] 126A Kiloliter(kl) 40 8896 [2F76] 126C Millisecond(ms) 41 8897 [2F77] 126E Microsecond 42 8898 [2F78] 1270 Nanosecond(ns) 43 8899 [2F79] 1272 Horsepower(HP) 44 889A [2F7A] 1274 Horsepower(ps) 45 889B [2F7B] 1276 Hertz(Hz) 46 889C [2F7C] 1278 Joint-stock corporation((Inc.)) 47 889D [2F7D] 127A Copyright((c))

B.LADDER DIAGRAM FOR COMPENSATION PROCESSING ON THE TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER SCREEN APPENDIX B-66254EN/05

- 200 -

B LADDER DIAGRAM FOR COMPENSATION PROCESSING ON THE TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER SCREEN

This ladder diagram provides an example of basic operation for compensation value I/O input (with no parity check) with the Power Mate i-LNA. Mode and valid range checks required in actual use are not included.

B-66254EN/05 APPENDIX B.LADDER DIAGRAM FOR COMPENSATION PROCESSING ON THE TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER SCREEN

- 201 -

B.LADDER DIAGRAM FOR COMPENSATION PROCESSING ON THE TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER SCREEN APPENDIX B-66254EN/05

- 202 -

B-66254EN/05 APPENDIX B.LADDER DIAGRAM FOR COMPENSATION PROCESSING ON THE TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER SCREEN

- 203 -

C.FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT PROCEDURE APPENDIX B-66254EN/05

- 204 -

C FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT PROCEDURE

B-66254EN/05 APPENDIX C.FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT PROCEDURE

- 205 -

C.1 OVERVIEW By entering data in FPAssist sheets, create a FANUC Series 18i-LNA /LNB flow diagnosis function database (character strings to be displayed on the screen and diagnosis flow information for flow diagnosis). The FPAssist sheets consist of four section as described below. <1> Flow diagnostic screen (1/4)

Enter the following information: • Fault code (type code, part code, maintenance level code,

suffix/alarm No) character strings • Fault title character strings • Presumed cause character strings • Message IDs at the start of flow diagnosis

<2> Flow diagnostic screen (2/4)

Enter information about flow diagnosis control and flow diagnostic messages


If a detailed description is required for a flow diagnostic message, enter data in this sheet. An image file name and detailed description can be entered.


Enter a definition on the operation buttons to be displayed at the bottom of the flow diagnostic screen. This sheet is not explained here. See the description of the flow diagnostic screen.


- 206 -

C.2 DATA CREATION AND INPUT PROCEDURE

C.2.1 Creating Display Information for Each Alarm/Information Required for Diagnosis Flows

First, create information to be displayed when an alarm is issued, and a diagnosis flowchart. Then, for each alarm, determine data to be entered. (See the example of handling data provided later.) For the number of characters and format, observe the restrictions below. Fault code (half-size characters) • Type code (3 half-size characters max.) • Part code (1 half-size character max.) • Maintenance level code (1 half-size character max.) • Suffix/alarm No, NC error code (16 half-size characters max.) Various character strings • An alarm name (title) not longer than 32 bytes (16 full-size)

characters can be described in one line. • Up to three presumed causes (three lines), each not longer than

32 bytes (16 full-size characters), can be described. • Each flow element, not longer than 32 bytes (16 full-size

characters), can be described in up to 4 lines. (For each flow element, prepare a message ID (consisting of up to 6 half-size characters). A message ID is used as a jump destination when a diagnosis flow is described in a flow diagnosis sheet.)


- 207 -

Example of handling data: 014 High pressure coolant fault


- 208 -

C.2.2 Input of Data into Excel Sheets Enter data created in Subsection C.2.1 into Excel sheets for each alarm number.

C.2.2.1 Input of data into the fault diagnostic screen sheet Enter a fault code, fault name (title), and presumed cause character strings determined in Subsection C.2.1. In the message ID column on the right side, enter the first character string to be displayed in flow diagnosis, that is, the message ID at the start of the flow (flow diagnosis sheet). (See Fig. C.2.2.1 below.)

<2><1> <3> <4> <5>

Fig.C.2.2.1 Example of entering data in the flow diagnostic screen sheet <1> Screen number/alarm number (5 half-size numeric characters

max.) Two-byte alarm code (decimal) entered from the PMC <2> Fault code (to be entered using half-size characters)

• Type code (3 half-size characters max.) • Part code (1 half-size character max.) • Maintenance level code (1 half-size character max.) • Suffix/alarm No, NC error code (16 half-size characters

max.) <3> Fault title

• A title not longer than 32 bytes (16 full-size characters) can be entered in one line.

<4> Presumed cause

• Up to three major presumed causes (three lines), each not longer than 32 bytes (16 full-size characters), can be entered.

<5> Message ID (consisting of up to 6 half-size characters) Enter a message ID to be displayed at the start of a diagnosis

flow in the flow diagnosis sheet.


- 209 -

C.2.2.2 Entering data in the flow diagnosis sheet According to a created flowchart, enter flow diagnostic messages in the setting table (2/4). (See Fig. C.2.2.2 below.)

<4><1> <3><2> <5>

Fig.C.2.2.2 Example of entering data in the flow diagnosis sheet <1> Entering message IDs and flow diagnostic messages

• Enter a message ID in the column of message ID, then enter the corresponding message character string in the same line of the column of flow diagnostic message.

• One flow diagnostic message cell can contain up to 128 half-size characters (= 32 half-size characters x 4 lines).

• Enter \n to perform a new line operation intentionally. • When the first 32 characters of a character string entered are

displayed on the screen, the character string is automatically wrapped to the next line unless you intentionally perform a new line operation. Those characters at the end of a character string beyond the 32 characters are not displayed.

• Do not perform more than three new line operations in one cell, and do not enter more than 32 half-size characters in each line.

• Change the color of the cell of a destination ID for a jump from an NC diagnosis flow to light blue. (See the note below.)


- 210 -

NOTE About calling the machine flow diagnosis from an

NC alarm If the necessity of diagnosis on the machine side is concluded after an NC alarm flow diagnosis, the troubleshooting guidance function calls a special message ID to make a transition to flow diagnosis on the machine side. On the flow diagnosis sheet, all message IDs starting with M are reserved as jump destinations from an NC alarm flow diagnosis. Those message IDs that start with M can be used only as jump destinations from the NC.

[Reserved message IDs]


1 M205 Rigid mode DI OFF The rigid mode DI signal (G061.0) is not set to 1 when G84 (G74, G88) is executed.

2 M407 Excessive synchronous axis error

Two axes to be moved synchronously lost mechanical synchronism with each other and are placed in a twisted state.

3 M409 Abnormal load detected

A mechanical collision or twist occurred, resulting in a load torque higher than a normal operation value.

4 M410 Excessive stop error A mechanical collision or twist occurred, disabling an axis from reaching a target position.

5 M411 Excessive move error A mechanical collision or twist occurred, disabling an axis from moving.

6 M420 Excessive torque difference

Two axes to be moved synchronously lost mechanical synchronism with each other, resulting in a large torque difference.

7 M421 Excessive semi-closed loop error

With a closed-loop machine, a shift occurred between the motion of the motor and the motion of the separate detector for a cause such as a mechanical twist.

8 M436 OVC alarm A mechanical collision or twist occurred, resulting in a large load and the flow of an excessive current.

In the future, a message ID to which a jump is made from

the NC may be added as development proceeds. So, do no use a message ID starting with M which may or may not be included in the table above.

<2> Diagnosis flow description

• In the column of next message ID, set a message ID (for each flow element) to specify a jump destination used when YES and NO are replied.

• Enter -1 if no operation is performed (no jump is made) when YES or NO is replied.

• For the end of a flow diagnosis, enter -1 in the columns of YES and NO.

<3> Automatic diagnosis function and argument

Do not enter any data in these columns.


- 211 -

<4> Button GRP number

Specify the group number of the touch buttons to be displayed at the bottom of the screen. For details, see the description the flow diagnostic screen.

<5> Note column

Information entered in this column has no effect on the data entered in other columns. Use this column to enter information such as a comment.

C.2.2.3 Enter data in the detailed description sheet

If detailed descriptions are required for flow diagnostic messages, an image file and detailed description can be defined to explain each flow diagnostic message. A defined image file and detailed description are displayed on the detailed guidance screen.

<1> <2> <3>

Fig.C.2.2.3 Example of entering data in the detailed description sheet <1> Message ID

Specify the message ID of a message for which an image file and detailed description are to be defined.

<2> File name

Specify a desired image file name. A file in the BMP format or JPEG format can be specified.

<3> Detailed description

Enter a character string as a detailed description. Enter the first 255 half-size characters (127 full-size characters) in the left-hand column. Enter additional characters in the right-hand column.


- 212 -

C.3 CREATING FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES FOR MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY

With FPAssist Version 6.01 and later, multi-language display and creation of flow diagnostic messages in three languages including Japanese, English, Polish and Chinese have become possible. For multi-language display, multi-language settings are required. See Subsection 4.3.3, "Setting a Project". Specifically, select the [Setting of project] menu button of FANUC PICTURE then [Setting of Multi-language], and check "The Multi-language display function is used." to allow multi-language display switching. The setting sheet of the flow diagnostic function registered in FPAssist is regarded as the message sheet for the output language. To create messages for other three languages, add a setting sheet for each language.

C.3.1 Add Button for Multi-Language Setting Sheets This button cannot be used unless "The Multi-language display function is used." in [Setting of Multi-language] of the [Setting of project] menu button of FANUC PICTURE is checked. When this button is pressed, message creation sheets for languages other than the language set as the output language are added. The added sheets are for the remaining three languages. The name of a sheet consists of the registered flow diagnostic screen name and the characters registered in the Remark field of the language key. ([Setting of project] dialog box - [Setting of Multi-language] tab - Remark of the language key list displayed in the lower part) Example) When output language = 1, and the flow diagnostic screen name

is "FLOW" FLOW-JP (Message sheet for Japanese) FLOW (Message sheet for English) FLOW-PL (Message sheet for Polish) FLOW-CH (Message sheet for Chinese)


- 213 -

C.3.2 Deleting Multi-Language Setting Sheets This button deletes added multi-language flow diagnostic setting sheets for three languages. Once a sheet is deleted, it cannot be restored.

C.3.3 Input of Data into Multi-Language Setting Sheets The method for entering data into a multi-language setting sheet is the same as for data entry into a setting sheet for a single language. See Appendix C.2.2, "Input of Data into Excel Sheets". Multi-language setting sheets contain cells having a light-yellow background, in which no data can be entered. In such cells, data set in the message sheet for the output language (the FLOW sheet in the example in Appendix C.3.1) is set. For cells other than light-yellow cells, set flow diagnostic language data.

D.METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA APPENDIX B-66254EN/05

- 214 -

D METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA

B-66254EN/05 APPENDIX D.METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA

- 215 -

D.1 FUNCTION OVERVIEW Among the machine operator's panel data items stored in the SRAM, the data items listed below can be transferred to a specified D area of the PMC at certain intervals. • Tool exchange counter screen

Stop value 48 items Current value 48 items

• Cycle time measurement screen

Cycle time 11 items (Past 10 data items and reference value of total cycle time data)

• Fault count screen

Fault count of today 284 items • Operational situation screen

Equipment fault occurrence count of today....................... 1 item Equipment fault occurrence time of today......................... 1 item Tool exchange count of today .......................................... 1 item Tool exchange time of today ............................................. 1 item Quality check count of today............................................. 1 item Quality check time of today............................................... 1 item Continuous off count of today ........................................... 1 item Continuous off time of today............................................. 1 item Parts full count of to today ................................................ 1 item Parts full time of today ...................................................... 1 item No-part count of today....................................................... 1 item No-part time of today ........................................................ 1 item Cycle time of today............................................................ 1 item Number of machined parts of today .................................. 1 item Operation rate of today ...................................................... 1 item OK part rate of today ......................................................... 1 item


- 216 -

D.2 DATA STRUCTURE The structure of data transferred to a D area is indicated below. All data is represented as binary values. With FPAssist, specify the start address of a D area to which data is to be transferred. A specifiable address is a multiple of 4. If an address other than a multiple of 4 is specified with FPAssist, the specified address is rounded to the multiple of 4 that is closest to and smaller than the specified value.

1st item of tool exchange counter stop value (4 bytes) 0

4

Offset from a D area start address specified with FPAssist

2nd item of tool exchange counter stop value (4 bytes)

:

47th item of tool exchange counter stop value (4 bytes)

48th item of tool exchange counter stop value (4 bytes)

8

184

188

1921st item of tool exchange counter current value (4 bytes)

1962nd item of tool exchange counter current value (4 bytes)

:

47th item of tool exchange counter current value (4 bytes)

48 item of tool exchange counter current value (4 bytes)

200

376

380

3841st item of fault count of today (2 bytes)

3862nd item of fault count of today (2 bytes)

:

283rd item of fault count of today (2 bytes)

284th item of fault count of today (2 bytes)

388

948

950

952Cycle time reference value (2 bytes)

Cycle time past 1 (2 bytes)


:



954

956

958

970

972

974

976Cycle time of today (operational situation screen) (2 bytes)

982

984

986

Equipment fault occurrence count of today (2 bytes)

Tool exchange count of today (2 bytes)

Quality check count of today (2 bytes)

Continuous cut count of today (2 bytes)

Parts full count of today (2 bytes)

No-part count of today (2 bytes)

978

980

Unit: Times

Unit: Times

Unit: Times

Unit: 0.1 second

Unit: 0.1 second

Unit: 0.1 second

Unit: Times

Unit: Times

Unit: Times

Unit: Times

Unit: Times

Unit: Times 988


- 217 -

Operation rate of today (4 bytes) 992

996 OK part rate of today (4 bytes)

1008

1012

1016

Equipment fault occurrence time of today (4 bytes)

Tool exchange time of today (4 bytes)

Quality check time of today (4 bytes)

Continuous off time of today (4 bytes)

Parts full time of today (4 bytes)

No-part time of today (4 bytes)

1000

1004

Unit: 0.1%

Unit: Seconds

Unit: Seconds

Unit: Seconds

Unit: Seconds

Unit: Seconds

Unit: Seconds1020

Number of machined parts (4 bytes) 988

Unit: 0.1%

Unit: Pieces

1024


- 218 -

D.3 METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S PANEL DATA WITH THE FL-net FUNCTION

This section describes how machine operator's panel data transferred to a D area can be read by another machine connected via FL-net. For details of FL-net, refer to the "FL-net Operator's Manual (B-63434EN)". (1) Setting the FL-net parameters (on the server side)

* The server side means the machine that transfers the SRAM data of its operator's panel to a D area of the PMC.

On the FL-net parameter setting screen, set the items below. • IP ADDRESS

Specify an IP address. With FL-net, an IP address of class C is used. The default IP address used with FL-net is 192.168.250.***, where *** represents a node number. A node number from 1 to 254 is to be set.

• MESSAGE Specify the start address and size of a R area of the PMC to be used for the transmission and reception interfaces of the message transmission function with confirmation. Set the items below. <1> ADDRESS

Set the start address of a R area of the PMC to be used for the transmission interface area of the message transmission server function with confirmation. Set the same value as set in the item of R area Trans I/F address of [Setting of entire system (4/4)] of FPAssist.

<2> SIZE Set the size of the interface area above. Set 20.

<3> RECV ADDRESS Set the start address of a R area of the PMC to be used for the reception interface area of the message transmission server function with confirmation. Set the same value as set in the item of R area Receive I/F address of [Setting of entire system (4/4)] of FPAssist.


* Use the defaults for the other items.


- 219 -

(2) Setting the FL-net parameters (on the client side) * The client side means the machine that requests the server

side to transfer the SRAM data of the machine operator's panel.

On the FL-net parameter setting screen, set the items below. • IP ADDRESS

Specify an IP address. With FL-net, an IP address of class C is used. The default IP address used with FL-net is 192.168.250.***, where *** represents a node number. A node number from 1 to 254 is to be set.

• MESSAGE Specify the start address and size of a R area of the PMC to be used for the transmission and reception interfaces of the message transmission function with confirmation. Set the items below. <1> ADDRESS

Set the start address of a R area of the PMC to be used for the transmission interface area of the message transmission client function with confirmation.


* The client side does not use the receive interface of the message transmission function.

* Use the defaults for the other items.


- 220 -

(3) Method of creating a user project for transferring server side data The flow of a user program that starts with the issue of a data transfer request to the server and ends with the actual transfer of data is shown below.

Prepare request message

Response flag set to other than 1?

Response flag set to 8000h?

Set response flag to 0

Start

End

n

y

y

Error processing

n

<1>

<2>

<3>

<4>

<5>

Set transfer request flag to 1

<1> Prepare a request message. For reading data sent from the server, the byte block data read function with confirmation or word block data read function with confirmation is used. • When the byte block data read function with

confirmation is used Set data according to the following format in the transmission interface area set on the FL-net parameter setting screen on the client side:


- 221 -

Transferrequest/response flag

Request statusResponse status

Cancel flagDestination node number

(Reserved)

Transaction code

(Reserved)

Offset address ofvirtual address space

Data size

Start address of theread data buffer

0

2 3 4 5 6

8

12

10

16

18

20

Set 0.Set 0.Set 0.Set the node number of the server side

Set 65003.

Set 1024.

Set the start address of a R area for storingdata read from the server side.

Set 01014000h + Start address of a datatransfer destination D area on the serverside specified with FPAssist

• When the word block data read function with confirmation is used Set data according to the following format in the transmission interface area set on the FL-net parameter setting screen on the client side:

Transfer request/response flag

Request statusResponse status

Cancel flagDestination node number

(Reserved)

Transaction code

(Reserved)

Offset address of virtual address space

Data size

Start address of the read data buffer

0

2 3 4 5 6

8

12

10

16

18

20

Set 0. Set 0. Set 0. Set the node number of the server side

Set 65005.

Set 512.

Set the start address of a R area for storing data read from the server side.

Set 0100A000h + {(Start address of a data transfer destination D area on the server side specified with FPAssist)÷2}

<2> Set the transfer request flag to 1. Set the transfer request/response flag of the transmission interface area to 1 to issue a transfer request.


- 222 -

<3> Wait until a value other than 1 is returned to the response flag. Wait until a value other than 1 is returned to the transfer request/response flag of the transmission interface area. While the transfer request/response flag is set to 1, do not rewrite the data in the transmission interface area.

<4> Check if the response flag is normal. If 8000h is returned to the transfer request/response flag, data transfer is terminated normally. In other cases, data transfer is terminated abnormally. In the case of normal termination, the data of 1024 bytes starting at the start address of the R area specified in the start address field of the read data buffer of the transmission interface area is stored. In the case of abnormal termination, stop processing, and correct the cause of the error according to the value of the response flag.

<5> Perform end processing. Set the transfer request/response flag to 0 to be ready for issuing the next request.

B-66254EN/05 APPENDIX E.OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP

- 223 -

E OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP When the built-in PLC is used without using the PMC, the operator's panel is connected with a PLC ladder program via the M/N areas indicated below. The pages that follow indicate an example of signal arrangement in the M/N areas. The signal arrangement is indicated as an example for reference. The user can freely change the signal arrangement. However, among the signals output from the operator's panel, the 48 bits from M0112 to M0117 are used as a work area internally by the operator's panel, so the bits must be dedicated to the operator's panel, and must not be used for other purposes. The areas from N0400 to N0511 and from M0400 to M0511 are also internally used as work areas for the operator's panel, so these areas cannot be used for signals of the machine tool builder.

E.OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP APPENDIX B-66254EN/05

- 224 -

Interface for the second spindle under two-path control and machine operator's panel DI

Interface for the second spindle and data transfer

PMC→CNC CNC→PMC

Interface for one-path control N0000

N0017N0024

N0040

N0057

N0080

N0256

M0000

M0027

M0044

M0062

M0256

Interface for one-path control

M0089

M0112

~ ~

PMC address PMC address

N0062

M0093

M0300

M0274N0272

~ ~

N0069

N0300

N0316

N0332

N0352

N0400

N0511

Interface for controlling the first and second index

Interface for two-path control Interface for the second spindle under two-path control and machine

operator's panel DO

Reserved

Additional interface

Interface for operator's panel

N0080 to N0254

Interface for controlling the fifth and sixth index

Interface for load torque monitor

Interface for controlling the third and fourth

Interface for controlling the seventh and eighth

Safety circuit DI area

Reserved

Reserved area for operator's panel

~ ~

M0099 Additional interface

Interface for the second spindle and data transfer

Interface for controlling the first and second index axes

Interface for two-path control

Reserved

M0318

M0336

M0346

M0400

M0511

Interface for controlling the fifth and sixth index

Interface for load torque monitor

Interface for controlling the third and fourth index

Interface for controlling the seventh and eighth

Safety circuit DO area

Reserved

Reserved area for operator's panel

~ ~

Interface for operator's panel

M0112 to M0254

M0118Working area for operator's panel

Signals dedicated to 18i-LNB

For 18i-LNA, used for control of 3rd and 4th index axes


- 225 -

E.1 PLC → OPERATOR'S PANEL (N0080 TO N0254)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

N0080 (0280)

Tool page 1 forecast screen

Tool page 3stop screen

Tool page 2 stop screen

Tool page 1stop screen

NC-related fault screen

Equipment fault screen

Manual selection screen

Buzzer stop screen ↑

N0081 (0288)

Compensation page 3 limit

screen


screen


screen

Tool page 3pre-forecast

screen


screen


screen



Screen switch-ing, etc.

N0082 (0290)

Manual selection Run button

Back-light turn-off disable

condition

Disable alarm message display

Path selection Reserved screen


screen ↓

N0083 (0298)

Fault display turn-on LMP08







Fault display turn-on LMP01 ↑

N0084 (02A0)









N0085 (02A8)









N0086 (02B0)









N0087 (02B8)









N0088 (02C0)









Fault display blinking

N0089 (02C8)









N0090 (02D0) Fault display

turn-on LMP63 Fault display


turn-on LMP61Fault display




turn-on LMP57

N0091 (02D8) Fault display

turn-on BTN07 Fault display


turn-on BTN05Fault display




turn-on BTN01

N0092 (02E0)

Fault display blinking BTN07







↓

N0093 (02E8)

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP08

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP07

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP06

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP05

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP04

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP03

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP02

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP01↑

N0094 (02F0)

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP16

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP15

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP14

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP13

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP12

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP11

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP10

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP09

N0095 (02F8)

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP24

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP23

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP22

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP21

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP20

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP19

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP18

Manual operation 1

turn-on LMP17

M0096 (0300)

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP08

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP07

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP06

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP05

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP04

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP03

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP02

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP01

M0097 (0308)

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP16

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP15

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP14

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP13

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP12

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP11

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP10

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP09

M0098 (0310)

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP24

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP23

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP22

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP21

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP20

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP19

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP18

Manual operation 2

turn-on LMP17

M0099 (0318)

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN08

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN07

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN06

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN05

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN04

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN03

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN02

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN01

M0100 (0320)

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN16

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN15

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN14

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN13

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN12

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN11

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN10

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN09

Manual operation screen

M0101 (0328)

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN24

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN23

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN22

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN21

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN20

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN19

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN18

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN17

M0102 (0330)

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN04

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN03

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN02

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN01

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN28

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN17

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN26

Manual operation 1

turn-on BTN25

M0103 (0338)

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN12

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN11

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN10

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN09

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN08

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN07

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN06

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN05

M0104 (0340)

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN20

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN19

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN18

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN17

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN16

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN15

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN14

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN13

M0105 (0348)

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN28

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN17

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN26

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN25

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN24

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN23

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN22

Manual operation 2

turn-on BTN21

M0106 (0350)

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN08

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN07

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN06

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN05

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN04

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN03

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN02

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN01

↓


- 226 -

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

M0107 (0358)

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN16

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN15

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN14

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN13

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN12

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN11

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN10

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN09

↑

M0108 (0360)

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN24

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN23

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN22

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN21

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN20

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN19

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN18

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN17

M0109 (0368)

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN04

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN03

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN02

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN01

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN28

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN17

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN26

Manual operation 1

blinking BTN25

M0110 (0370)

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN12

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN11

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN10

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN09

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN08

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN07

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN06

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN05

Manual operation screen

M0111 (0378)

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN20

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN19

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN18

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN17

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN16

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN15

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN14

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN13

M0112 (0380)

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN28

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN17

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN26

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN25

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN24

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN23

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN22

Manual operation 2

blinking BTN21

↓

M0113 (0388) M0114 (0390) Manual operation page 1 tool 1 (KOGU1) M0115 (0398) Manual operation page 1 tool 1 (KOGU1) M0116 (03A0) Manual operation page 1 tool 2 (KOGU2) M0117 (03A8) Manual operation page 1 tool 2 (KOGU2) M0118 (03B0) Manual operation page 1 tool 3 (KOGU3) M0119 (03B8) Manual operation page 1 tool 3 (KOGU3) M0120 (03C0) M0121 (03C8) M0122 (03D0) Manual operation page 2 tool 1 (KOGU1) M0123 (03D8) Manual operation page 2 tool 1 (KOGU1) M0124 (03E0) Manual operation page 2 tool 2 (KOGU2) M0125 (03E8) Manual operation page 2 tool 2 (KOGU2) M0126 (03F0) Manual operation page 2 tool 3 (KOGU1) M0127 (03F8) Manual operation page 2 tool 3 (KOGU1) N0128 (0400) N0129 (0408)

N0130 (0410)

NC operation turn-on LMP08







NC operation turn-on LMP01 ↑

Program check screen coordinate selection 5 N0131 (0418) #3 #2 #1 #0





N0132 (0420)

NC operation turn-on BTN08








N0133 (0428)









N0134 (0430)









N0135 (0438) NC operation

turn-on BTN28NC operation

turn-on BTN27NC operation

turn-on BTN26 NC operation

turn-on BTN25

NC operation screen

N0136 (0440)

NC operation blinking BTN08








N0137 (0448)









N0138 (0450)









N0139 (0458)





↓


- 227 -

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 N0140 (0460)

Tool exchange 1 CNT08







Tool exchange 1 CNT01 ↑

N0141 (0468)









N0142 (0470)









N0143 (0478)









N0144 (0480)









N0145 (0488)









N0146 (0490)

Tool exchange 1 reset08








N0147 (0498)









N0148 (04A0)









N0149 (04A8)









N0150 (04B0)









N0151 (04B8)









N0152 (04C0)

Tool exchange 1 detected

fault 08


fault 07


fault 06


fault 05


fault 04


fault 03


fault 02


fault 01

N0153 (04C8)


fault 16


fault 15


fault 14


fault 13


fault 12


fault 11


fault 10


fault 09

N0154 (04D0)


fault 08


fault 07


fault 06


fault 05


fault 04


fault 03


fault 02


fault 01

N0155 (04D8)


fault 16


fault 15


fault 14


fault 13


fault 12


fault 11


fault 10


fault 09

Tool exchangecounter screen

N0156 (04E0)


fault 08


fault 07


fault 06


fault 05


fault 04


fault 03


fault 02


fault 01

N0157 (04E8)


fault 16


fault 15


fault 14


fault 13


fault 12


fault 11


fault 10


fault 09

N0158 (04F0)

Tool exchange 1 turn-on 08








N0159 (04F8)









N0160 (0500)









N0161 (0508)









N0162 (0510)









N0163 (0518)









N0164 (0520) Tool exchange

3 turn-on 18 Tool exchange

3 turn-on 17Tool exchange



3 turn-on 14 Tool exchange

3 turn-on 13

N0165 (0528)

Tool exchange 1 blinking 08








N0166 (0530)









N0167 (0538)









N0168 (0540)









N0169 (0548)









N0170 (0550)









N0171 (0558) Tool exchange

3 blinking 18 Tool exchange 3 blinking 17




Tool exchange 3 blinking 13 ↓


- 228 -

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

N0172 (0560)

Tool compensation

2 turn-on BTN03

Tool compensation

2 turn-on BTN02

Tool compensation

2 turn-on BTN01

Tool compensation

1 turn-on BTN05

Tool compensation

1 turn-on BTN04

Tool compensation

1 turn-on BTN03

Tool compensation

1 turn-on BTN02

Tool compensation

1 turn-on BTN01

↑

N0173 (0568)

Tool compensation

4 turn-on BTN01

Tool compensation

3 turn-on BTN05

Tool compensation

31 turn-on BTN04

Tool compensation

3 turn-on BTN03

Tool compensation

3 turn-on BTN02

Tool compensation

3 turn-on BTN01

Tool compensation

2 turn-on BTN05

Tool compensation

2 turn-on BTN04

N0174 (0570)

Tool compensation

1 blinking BTN04

Tool compensation

1 blinking BTN03

Tool compensation

1 blinking BTN02

Tool compensation

1 blinking BTN01

Tool compensation

4 turn-on BTN05

Tool compensation

4 turn-on BTN04

Tool compensation

4 turn-on BTN03

Tool compensation

4 turn-on BTN02

Tool compen-

sation counter

N0175 (0578)

Tool compensation

3 blinking BTN02

Tool compensation

3 blinking BTN01

Tool compensation

2 blinking BTN05

Tool compensation

2 blinking BTN04

Tool compensation

2 blinking BTN03

Tool compensation

2 blinking BTN02

Tool compensation

2 blinking BTN01

Tool compensation

1 blinking BTN05

N0176 (0580)

Tool compensation

4 blinking BTN05

Tool compensation

4 blinking BTN04

Tool compensation

4 blinking BTN03

Tool compensation

4 blinking BTN02

Tool compensation

4 blinking BTN01

Tool compensation

3 blinking BTN05

Tool compensation

31 blinking BTN04

Tool compensation

3 blinking BTN03

↓

N0177 (0588)

Operation 8 start

Operation 7 start

Operation 6 start

Operation 5 start

Operation 4 start

Operation 3 start

Operation 2 start

Operation 1 start ↑

N0178 (0590)

Operation 16 start

Operation 15 start

Operation 14 start

Operation 13 start

Operation 12 start

Operation 11 start

Operation 10 start

Operation 9 start

N0179 (0598)

Operation 24 start

Operation 23 start

Operation 22 start

Operation 21 start

Operation 20 start

Operation 19 start

Operation 18 start

Operation 17 start

N0180 (05A0)

Operation 32 start

Operation 31 start

Operation 30 start

Operation 29 start

Operation 28 start

Operation 27 start

Operation 26 start

Operation 25 start

N0181 (05A8)

Operation 4 end

Operation 3 end

Operation 2 end

Operation 1 end

Operation 36 start

Operation 35 start

Operation 34 start

Operation 33 start

N0182 (05B0)

Operation 12 end

Operation 11 end

Operation 10 end

Operation 9 end

Operation 8 end

Operation 7 end

Operation 6 end

Operation 5 end

Cycle time

measure-ment screen

N0183 (05B8)

Operation 20 end

Operation 19 end

Operation 18 end

Operation 17 end

Operation 16 end

Operation 15 end

Operation 14 end

Operation 13 end

N0184 (05C0)

Operation 28 end

Operation 27 end

Operation 26 end

Operation 25 end

Operation 24 end

Operation 23 end

Operation 22 end

Operation 21 end

N0185 (05C8)

Operation 36 end

Operation 35 end

Operation 34 end

Operation 33 end

Operation 32 end

Operation 31 end

Operation 30 end

Operation 29 end ↓

N0186 (05D0) ANDON signal 1

N0187 (05D8) ANDON signal 1

N0188 (05E0) ANDON signal 2

N0189 (05E8) ANDON signal 2

↑ Opera-tional

situation screen

↓

N0190 (05F0) Motion sequence number

N0191 (05F8) Motion sequence number

↑ Manual opera-tion 2↓

N0192 (0600)

Operation status 1

command LMP15

Operation status 1

command LMP13

Operation status 1

command LMP11

Operation status 1

command LMP09

Operation status 1

command LMP07

Operation status 1

command LMP05

Operation status 1

command LMP03

Operation status 1

command LMP01

↑

N0193 (0608)

Operation status 1

command LMP31

Operation status 1

command LMP29

Operation status 1

command LMP27

Operation status 1

command LMP25

Operation status 1

command LMP23

Operation status 1

command LMP21

Operation status 1

command LMP19

Operation status 1

command LMP17

N0194 (0610)

Operation status 1

command LMP47

Operation status 1

command LMP45

Operation status 1

command LMP43

Operation status 1

command LMP41

Operation status 1

command LMP39

Operation status 1

command LMP37

Operation status 1

command LMP35

Operation status 1

command LMP33

N0195 (0618)

Operation status 2

command LMP15

Operation status 2

command LMP13

Operation status 2

command LMP11

Operation status 2

command LMP09

Operation status 2

command LMP07

Operation status 2

command LMP05

Operation status 2

command LMP03

Operation status 2

command LMP01

Opera-tion

status monitor screen

N0196 (0620)

Operation status 2

command LMP31

Operation status 2

command LMP29

Operation status 2

command LMP27

Operation status 2

command LMP25

Operation status 2

command LMP23

Operation status 2

command LMP21

Operation status 2

command LMP19

Operation status 2

command LMP17

N0197 (0628)

Operation status 2

command LMP47

Operation status 2

command LMP45

Operation status 2

command LMP43

Operation status 2

command LMP41

Operation status 2

command LMP39

Operation status 2

command LMP37

Operation status 2

command LMP35

Operation status 2

command LMP33

N0198 (0630)

Operation status 3

command LMP15

Operation status 3

command LMP13

Operation status 3

command LMP11

Operation status 3

command LMP09

Operation status 3

command LMP07

Operation status 3

command LMP05

Operation status 3

command LMP03

Operation status 3

command LMP01

↓


- 229 -

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

N0199 (0638)

Operation status 3

command LMP31

Operation status 3

command LMP29

Operation status 3

command LMP27

Operation status 3

command LMP25

Operation status 3

command LMP23

Operation status 3

command LMP21

Operation status 3

command LMP19

Operation status 3

command LMP17

↑

N0200 (0640)

Operation status 3

command LMP47

Operation status 3

command LMP45

Operation status 3

command LMP43

Operation status 3

command LMP41

Operation status 3

command LMP39

Operation status 3

command LMP37

Operation status 3

command LMP35

Operation status 3

command LMP33

N0201 (0648)

Operation status 1

command LMP16

Operation status 1

command LMP14

Operation status 1

command LMP12

Operation status 1

command LMP10

Operation status 1

command LMP08

Operation status 1

command LMP06

Operation status 1

command LMP04

Operation status 1

command LMP02

N0202 (0650)

Operation status 1

command LMP32

Operation status 1

command LMP30

Operation status 1

command LMP28

Operation status 1

command LMP26

Operation status 1

command LMP24

Operation status 1

command LMP22

Operation status 1

command LMP20

Operation status 1

command LMP18

N0203 (0658)

Operation status 1

command LMP48

Operation status 1

command LMP46

Operation status 1

command LMP44

Operation status 1

command LMP42

Operation status 1

command LMP40

Operation status 1

command LMP38

Operation status 1

command LMP36

Operation status 1

command LMP34

N0204 (0660)

Operation status 2

command LMP16

Operation status 2

command LMP14

Operation status 2

command LMP12

Operation status 2

command LMP10

Operation status 2

command LMP08

Operation status 2

command LMP06

Operation status 2

command LMP04

Operation status 2

command LMP02

N0205 (0668)

Operation status 2

command LMP32

Operation status 2

command LMP30

Operation status 2

command LMP28

Operation status 2

command LMP26

Operation status 2

command LMP24

Operation status 2

command LMP22

Operation status 2

command LMP20

Operation status 2

command LMP18

Opera-tion

status monitor screen

N0206 (0670)

Operation status 2

command LMP48

Operation status 2

command LMP46

Operation status 2

command LMP44

Operation status 2

command LMP42

Operation status 2

command LMP40

Operation status 2

command LMP38

Operation status 2

command LMP36

Operation status 2

command LMP34

N0207 (0678)

Operation status 3

command LMP16

Operation status 3

command LMP14

Operation status 3

command LMP12

Operation status 3

command LMP10

Operation status 3

command LMP08

Operation status 3

command LMP06

Operation status 3

command LMP04

Operation status 3

command LMP02

N0208 (0680)

Operation status 3

command LMP32

Operation status 3

command LMP30

Operation status 3

command LMP28

Operation status 3

command LMP26

Operation status 3

command LMP24

Operation status 3

command LMP22

Operation status 3

command LMP20

Operation status 3

command LMP18

N0209 (0688)

Operation status 3

command LMP48

Operation status 3

command LMP46

Operation status 3

command LMP44

Operation status 3

command LMP42

Operation status 3

command LMP40

Operation status 3

command LMP38

Operation status 3

command LMP36

Operation status 3

command LMP34

↓

N0210 (0690)

Fault 8 occurrence

Fault 7 occurrence

Fault 6 occurrence

Fault 5 occurrence

Fault 4 occurrence

Fault 3 occurrence

Fault 2 occurrence

Fault 1 occurrence ↑

N0211 (0698)

Fault 16 occurrence

Fault 15 occurrence

Fault 14 occurrence

Fault 13 occurrence

Fault 12 occurrence

Fault 11 occurrence

Fault 10 occurrence

Fault 9 occurrence

N0212 (06A0)

Fault 24 occurrence

Fault 23 occurrence

Fault 22 occurrence

Fault 21 occurrence

Fault 20 occurrence

Fault 19 occurrence

Fault 18 occurrence

Fault 17 occurrence

N0213 (06A8)

Fault 32 occurrence

Fault 31 occurrence

Fault 30 occurrence

Fault 29 occurrence

Fault 28 occurrence

Fault 27 occurrence

Fault 26 occurrence

Fault 25 occurrence

N0214 (06B0)

Fault 40 occurrence

Fault 39 occurrence

Fault 38 occurrence

Fault 37 occurrence

Fault 36 occurrence

Fault 35 occurrence

Fault 34 occurrence

Fault 33 occurrence

N0215 (06B8)

Fault 48 occurrence

Fault 47 occurrence

Fault 46 occurrence

Fault 45 occurrence

Fault 44 occurrence

Fault 43 occurrence

Fault 42 occurrence

Fault 41 occurrence

N0216 (06C0)

Fault 56 occurrence

Fault 55 occurrence

Fault 54 occurrence

Fault 53 occurrence

Fault 52 occurrence

Fault 51 occurrence

Fault 50 occurrence

Fault 49 occurrence

N0217 (06C8)

Fault 64 occurrence

Fault 63 occurrence

Fault 62 occurrence

Fault 61 occurrence

Fault 60 occurrence

Fault 59 occurrence

Fault 58 occurrence

Fault 57 occurrence

N0218 (06D0)

Fault 72 occurrence

Fault 71 occurrence

Fault 70 occurrence

Fault 69 occurrence

Fault 68 occurrence

Fault 67 occurrence

Fault 66 occurrence

Fault 65 occurrence

Fault count screen

N0219 (06D8)

Fault 80 occurrence

Fault 79 occurrence

Fault 78 occurrence

Fault 77 occurrence

Fault 76 occurrence

Fault 75 occurrence

Fault 74 occurrence

Fault 73 occurrence

N0220 (06E0)

Fault 88 occurrence

Fault 87 occurrence

Fault 86 occurrence

Fault 85 occurrence

Fault 84 occurrence

Fault 83 occurrence

Fault 82 occurrence

Fault 81 occurrence

N0221 (06E8)

Fault 96 occurrence

Fault 95 occurrence

Fault 94 occurrence

Fault 93 occurrence

Fault 92 occurrence

Fault 91 occurrence

Fault 90 occurrence

Fault 89 occurrence

N0222 (06F0)

Fault 104 occurrence





Fault 99 occurrence

Fault 98 occurrence

Fault 97 occurrence

N0223 (06F8)









N0224 (0700)









N0225 (0708)









N0226 (0710)








Fault 129 occurrence ↓


- 230 -

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 N0227 (0718)








Fault 137 occurrence ↑

N0228 (0720)









N0229 (0728)









Fault count screen

N0230 (0730)








Fault 161 occurrence ↓

N0231 (0738)

Alarm code read request Alarm timer

stop N0232 (0740) Alarm code data 1

N0233 (0748) Alarm code data 2

↑ Flow

diagnos-tic

screen↓

N0234 (0750)

N0235 (0758)

N0236 (0760)

N0237 (0768)

N0238 (0770)

Station 1 R completed

Station 1 R running

Station 1 clamp

Station 1 conveyor running

Station 1 unclamp

Station 1 L running

Station 1 L completed

Station 1 L cont. ↑

N0239 (0778)

Station 2 R running

Station 2 clamp


Station 2 unclamp

Station 2 L running


Station 2 L cont.

Station 1 R cont.

N0240 (0780)

Station 3 clamp


Station 3 unclamp

Station 3 L running


Station 3 L cont.

Station 2 R cont.


N0241 (0788)


Station 4 unclamp

Station 4 L running


Station 4 L cont.

Station 3 R cont.


Station 3 R running

N0242 (0790)

Station 5 unclamp

Station 5 L running


Station 5 L cont.

Station 4 R cont.


Station 4 R running

Station 4 clamp

N0243 (0798)

Station 6 L running


Station 6 L cont.

Station 5 R cont.


Station 5R running

Station 5 clamp


N0244 (07A0)


Station 7 L cont.

Station 6 R cont.


Station 6 R running

Station 6 clamp


Station 6 unclamp

N0245 (07A8)

Station 8 L cont.

Station 7 R cont.


Station 7 R running

Station 7 clamp


Station 7 unclamp

Station 7 L running

Running display screen

N0246 (07B0)

Station 8 R cont.


Station 8 R running

Station 8 clamp


Station 8 unclamp

Station 8 L running


N0247 (07B8)


Station 9 R running

Station 9 clamp


Station 9 unclamp

Station 9 L running


Station 9 L cont.

N0248 (07C0)

Station 10 R running

Station 10 clamp


Station 10 unclamp

Station 10 L running


Station 10 L cont.

Station 9 R cont.

N0249 (07C8)

Station 11 clamp


Station 11 unclamp



Station 11 L cont.

Station 10 R cont.


N0250 (07D0)


Station 12 unclamp



Station 12 L cont.

Station 11 R cont.



N0251 (07D8)

Station 13 unclamp



Station 13 L cont.

Station 12 R cont.



Station 12 clamp

N0252 (07E0)



Station 14 L cont.

Station 13 R cont.


Station 13R running

Station 13 clamp


N0253 (07E8)


Station 15 L cont.

Station 14 R cont.



Station 14 clamp


Station 14 unclamp

N0254 (07F0) Station 15 R

cont. Station 15 R completed


Station 15 clamp


Station 15 unclamp

Station 15 L running ↓


- 231 -

E.2 OPERATOR'S PANEL → PLC (M0112 TO M0254) M0112 to M0117 are dedicated to the operator's panel, and cannot be used for any other purposes.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

M0112 (0380)

Menu 2 blinking 3

Menu 2 blinking 2

Menu 2 blinking 1

Menu 1 blinking 5

Menu 1 blinking 4

Menu 1 blinking 3

Menu 1 blinking 2

Menu 1 blinking 1 ↑

M0113 (0388)

Menu 4 blinking 1

Menu 3 blinking 5

Menu 3 blinking 4

Menu 3 blinking 3

Menu 3 blinking 2

Menu 3 blinking 1

Menu 2 blinking 5

Menu 2 blinking 4

M0114 (0390)

Alarm reset turn-on work

Alarm reset turn-on work

Previous alarm turn-on

work

Compensation 3 ↓ page blinking



Tool 2 ↓ page blinking

Tool 1 ↓ page blinking

M0115 (0398)

Diagnosis image output

Diagnosis image blinking

Next alarm turn-on work

Compensation 3 ↑ page blinking



Tool 2 ↑ page blinking

Tool 1 ↑ page blinking

Operator's panel

work

M0116 (03A0)

Waveform sampling state

display

Previous step turn-on work

Flow NO turn-on work

Flow YES turn-on work

Menu 4 blinking 5

Menu 4 blinking 4

Menu 4 blinking 3

Menu 4 blinking 2

M0117 (03A8)

Menu page 4 ↓ blinking

Menu page 4 ↑ blinking

Menu page 3 blinking





Menu page 1 ↑ blinking ↓

M0118 (03B0)

Menu 4 BTN03

Menu 4 BTN02

Menu 4 BTN01

Menu 1 BTN05

Menu 1 BTN04

Menu 1 BTN03

Menu 1 BTN02

Menu 1 BTN01

M0119 (03B8) Menu 4

BTN05 Menu 4 BTN04

Menu 2 BTN05

Menu 2 BTN04

Menu 2 BTN03

Menu 2 BTN02

Menu 2 BTN01

M0120 (03C0) Menu 3

BTN05 Menu 3 BTN04

Menu 3 BTN03

Menu 3 BTN02

Menu 3 BTN01

M0121 (03C8)

Alarm code read

completion In break In shift Buzzer OFF

execution

↑

Screen display/entire

↓

M0122 (03D0) Fault display

output BTN07 Fault display


output BTN05Fault display




output BTN01

↑ Fault

display↓

M0123 (03D8)

Manual operation 1

outputBTN08

Manual operation 1

outputBTN07

Manual operation 1

outputBTN06

Manual operation 1

outputBTN05

Manual operation 1

outputBTN04

Manual operation 1

outputBTN03

Manual operation 1

outputBTN02

Manual operation 1

outputBTN01↑

M0124 (03E0)

Manual operation 1

outputBTN16

Manual operation 1

outputBTN15

Manual operation 1

outputBTN14

Manual operation 1

outputBTN13

Manual operation 1

outputBTN12

Manual operation 1

outputBTN11

Manual operation 1

outputBTN10

Manual operation 1

outputBTN09

M0125 (03E8)

Manual operation 1

outputBTN24

Manual operation 1

outputBTN23

Manual operation 1

outputBTN22

Manual operation 1

outputBTN21

Manual operation 1

outputBTN20

Manual operation 1

outputBTN19

Manual operation 1

outputBTN18

Manual operation 1

outputBTN17

M0126 (03F0)

Manual operation 2

outputBTN04

Manual operation 2

outputBTN03

Manual operation 2

outputBTN02

Manual operation 2

outputBTN01

Manual operation 1

outputBTN28

Manual operation 1

outputBTN27

Manual operation 1

outputBTN26

Manual operation 1

outputBTN25

Manual opera-

tion screen

M0127 (03F8)

Manual operation 2

outputBTN12

Manual operation 2

outputBTN11

Manual operation 2

outputBTN10

Manual operation 2

outputBTN09

Manual operation 2

outputBTN08

Manual operation 2

outputBTN07

Manual operation 2

outputBTN06

Manual operation 2

outputBTN05

M0128 (0400)

Manual operation 2

outputBTN20

Manual operation 2

outputBTN19

Manual operation 2

outputBTN18

Manual operation 2

outputBTN17

Manual operation 2

outputBTN16

Manual operation 2

outputBTN15

Manual operation 2

outputBTN14

Manual operation 2

outputBTN13

M0129 (0408)

Manual operation 2

outputBTN28

Manual operation 2

outputBTN27

Manual operation 2

outputBTN26

Manual operation 2

outputBTN25

Manual operation 2

outputBTN24

Manual operation 2

outputBTN23

Manual operation 2

outputBTN22

Manual operation 2

outputBTN21↓

M0130 (0410)

NC operation output

outputBTN08

NC operation output

outputBTN07

NC operation output

outputBTN06

NC operation output

outputBTN05

NC operation output

outputBTN04

NC operation output

outputBTN03

NC operation output

outputBTN02

NC operation output

outputBTN01↑

M0131 (0418)

NC operation output

outputBTN16

NC operation output

outputBTN15

NC operation output

outputBTN14

NC operation output

outputBTN13

NC operation output

outputBTN12

NC operation output

outputBTN11

NC operation output

outputBTN10

NC operation output

outputBTN09

M0132 (0420)

NC operation output

outputBTN24

NC operation output

outputBTN23

NC operation output

outputBTN22

NC operation output

outputBTN21

NC operation output

outputBTN20

NC operation output

outputBTN19

NC operation output

outputBTN18

NC operation output

outputBTN17

NC opera-

tion screen

M0133 (0428)

NC operation output

outputBTN28

NC operation output

outputBTN27

NC operation output

outputBTN26

NC operation output

outputBTN25↓


- 232 -

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

M0134 (0430)

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN08

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN07

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN06

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN05

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN04

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN03

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN02

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN01↑

M0135 (0438)

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN16

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN15

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN14

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN13

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN12

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN11

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN10

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN09

M0136 (0440)

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN06

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN05

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN04

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN03

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN02

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN01

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN18

Tool exchange 1

outputBTN17

M0137 (0448)

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN14

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN13

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN12

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN11

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN10

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN09

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN08

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN07

M0138 (0450)

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN04

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN03

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN02

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN01

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN18

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN17

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN16

Tool exchange 2

outputBTN15

M0139 (0458)

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN12

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN11

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN10

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN09

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN08

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN07

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN06

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN05

Tool excha-

nge counter screen

M0140 (0460)

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN18

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN17

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN16

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN15

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN14

Tool exchange 3

outputBTN13

M0141 (0468) Pre-forecast 1

count-up Forecast 1 count-up

Stop value 1 count-up



Stop value 2 count-up



Stop value 3 count-up ↓

M0144 (0480)

Tool compensation

2 output BTN03

Tool compensation

2 output BTN02

Tool compensation

2 output BTN01

Tool compensation

1 output BTN05

Tool compensation

1 output BTN04

Tool compensation

1 output BTN03

Tool compensation

1 output BTN02

Tool compensation

1 output BTN01

↑

M0145 (0488)

Tool compensation

4 output BTN01

Tool compensation

3 output BTN05

Tool compensation

3 output BTN04

Tool compensation

3 output BTN03

Tool compensation

3 output BTN02

Tool compensation

3 output BTN01

Tool compensation

2 output BTN05

Tool compensation

2 output BTN04

Tool compen-

sation counter

M0146 (0490)

Tool compensation

4 count-up

Tool compensation

3 count-up

Tool compensation

2 count-up

Tool compensation

1 count-up

Tool compensation

4 output BTN05

Tool compensation

4 output BTN04

Tool compensation

4 output BTN03

Tool compensation

4 output BTN02

↓

M0147 (0498)

: : : : : : : : : M0254 (07F0)

B-66254EN/05 INDEX

i-1

INDEX <A>

ACTIVATING FANUC PICTURE ................................21

ACTIVATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT

TOOL (FPAssist) ............................................................35

Add Button for Multi-Language Setting Sheets ............212

Adding a Multi-Language Caption Setting Sheet..........174

Alarm display subscreen .................................................82

Assistant V-UP................................................................44

Automatic Screen Switching, Initial Screen Setting, etc. -

Setting Table (2/4) ..........................................................64

Axis coordinate display subscreen ..................................82

<B> BTN01 to BTN07: Manual buttons.................................72

Built-in Safety Logic Status Screen ..............................156

BUTTON AND LAMP SIGNAL DISPLAY

FUNCTION ....................................................................11

Button Area Setting - Setting Table (2/2)........................76

Button Area Setting - Setting Table (4/4)......................144

<C> CHECKING DATA SETTINGS ..................................181

CHECKING SCREEN DATA........................................53

Compensation operation................................................100

Compensation processing..............................................101

Components ....................................................................72

COMPOSITE SCREEN DISPLAY ................................40

CONTROL TO BE READ IN USER FORM ...............183

CONVERTING DATA...................................................53

Copy................................................................................52

COPYING OPERATOR'S PANEL SCREEN DATA

AND THE FP DRIVER TO A MEMORY CARD .........39

Counter Setting - Setting Table (1/3) ..............................94

Counter Signal Setting - Setting Table (2/3) .................104

Counting of the number of faults and measurement of

stop time........................................................................113

Create ..............................................................................50

CREATING A NEW PROJECT.....................................27

CREATING A SCREEN IN A LANGUAGE OTHER

THAN JAPANESE ...........................................................9

Creating Display Information for Each

Alarm/Information Required for Diagnosis Flows........206

CREATING FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

FOR MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ........................212

Creating Memory Card Format Data...............................36

CYCLE MONITOR SCREEN......................................152

Cycle Monitor Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1) ......152

Cycle Time Item Name and Measurement Signal

Setting - Setting Table (1/1) ..........................................118

CYCLE TIME MEASUREMENT SCREEN................116

CYCLE TIME SETTING SCREEN .............................119

<D> DATA CREATION AND INPUT PROCEDURE ........206

DATA REFLECTION IN FPASSIST...........................182

DATA STRUCTURE....................................................216

Default name button ........................................................63

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND

NOTE............................................................................. s-1

Del...................................................................................51

Deleting Multi-Language Setting Sheets.......................213

Detailed description screen ...........................................137

Detailed Guidance Screen .............................................131

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE SCREEN SHEET

LIST AND FORM DATA.............................................184

Display and resetting of a current value ........................101

Display of tool exchange information .............................93

DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS ................................191

DOWNLOADING SCREEN DATA TO THE CNC ......46

<E> Edge type operation.......................................................117

EDITING A PROJECT...................................................35

Edition Display Screen....................................................57

Enter data in the detailed description sheet ...................211

ENTERING A MULTI-LANGUAGE CAPTION

SETTING SHEET.........................................................178

Entering data in the flow diagnosis sheet ......................209

ENVIRONMENT, CONDITIONS, AND SETTING

OF THE MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT

TOOL............................................................................170

ERROR .........................................................................181

Explanation of Displayed Multi-Language Caption

Setting Sheet Functions.................................................175

INDEX B-66254EN/05

i-2

<F> FANUC Special Characters ..........................................199

Fault Count Related Setting - Setting Table (1/1) .........115

FAULT COUNT SCREEN (USED FOR 36 AND 168

FAULT ITEMS)............................................................112

FAULT DISPLAY SCREEN..........................................71

Fault Message Setting - Setting Table (4/4) ....................90

Fault Title and Presumed Cause Setting - Setting Table

(1/4)...............................................................................140

Flow diagnosis continuation function after the power

Is turned on again ..........................................................137

FLOW DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE INPUT

PROCEDURE...............................................................204

Flow Diagnostic Message Setting - Setting Table (2/4) 142

FLOW DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN ..................................133

Flow read function ........................................................138

FPAssist Multi-Language Setting Sheet........................178

FUNCTION OVERVIEW ............................................215

<I> I/O DEDICATED TO THE OPERATOR'S PANEL ........9

Image File Name and Detail Message Setting - Setting

Table (3/4).....................................................................143

INDICATOR DISPLAY WHEN THE CNC SCREEN

DISPLAY FUNCTION (TWO-SCREEN DISPLAY) IS

USED ..............................................................................10

Initializing the Add-in Tools for Excel2000 ...................17

Input of Data into Excel Sheets.....................................208

Input of Data into Multi-Language Setting Sheets ........213

Input of data into the fault diagnostic screen sheet .......208

INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE & FPASSIST...........15

INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE&FPAssist /

(A08B-9010-J513 #ZZ11)...............................................15

INSTALLING MICROSOFT VISUAL BASIC .............14

INSTALLING THE TOOL.............................................13

Interlock (available with E3.02 and later) .....................102

<J> JIS Level 1 ....................................................................193

JIS Level 2 ....................................................................198

<L> LADDER DIAGRAM FOR COMPENSATION

PROCESSING ON THE TOOL COMPENSATION

COUNTER SCREEN....................................................200

Lamp and Button Area Setting - Setting Table (1/4, 2/4,

3/4) ................................................................................124

Lamp and Manual Button Setting - Setting Tables (1/3,

2/3) ..................................................................................79

Lamp Area and Button Area Setting - Setting Tables (1/4,

2/4) ..................................................................................85

Lamp Area Setting - Setting Table (1/3) .......................107

Lamp Area Setting - Setting Table (1/3) .......................110

Lamp Setting - Setting Table (1/2)..................................75

Level type operation......................................................117

LMP01 to LMP63: Lamps ..............................................72

LOAD TORQUE MONITOR SCREEN.......................145

Load Torque Monitor Screen Setting - Setting Table

(1/1)...............................................................................145

<M> MANUAL OPERATION 2 SCREEN...........................123

MANUAL OPERATION SCREEN (COMMON

SPECIFICATIONS FOR PAGE 1 AND PAGE 2) .........77

MANUAL OPERATION SCREEN AND 5- BUTTON

MENU.............................................................................12

Measurement of the current value counter ......................92

Method of Alarm Code Transfer ...................................130

Method of alarm code transfer ......................................136

Method of Composite Screen Output ..............................43

Method of flow diagnostic message creation ................136

METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S

PANEL DATA..............................................................214

METHOD OF TRANSFERRING OPERATOR'S

PANEL DATA WITH THE FL-NET FUNCTION ......218

MINIMIZATION............................................................54

Move ...............................................................................51

Multi-Language Batch Input ...........................................36

MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH INPUT TOOL ............169

Multi-Language Display of a Project with

Single-Language User Forms........................................176

<N> NC OPERATION SCREEN............................................81

NEED............................................................................181

Numeric Display Area and Motion Sequence Setting -

Setting Table (4/4).........................................................125

Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (2/3) .....107

Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (2/3) .....110

Numeric Display Area Setting - Setting Table (3/3) .......80

B-66254EN/05 INDEX

i-3

Numeric display subscreen..............................................78

<O> OK................................................................................. 181

ONE-BYTE CHARACTERS........................................192

OPENING A PROJECT..................................................30

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ......................................4

OPERATING THE SCREEN CREATION SUPPORT

TOOL (FPASSIST).........................................................48

Operation Button Setting - Setting Table (3/3) ...............96

Operation Button Setting - Setting Table (3/3) .............105

Operation for Composite Screen Display........................41

Operation Indicator Lamp Setting - Setting Table (3/3) 111

OPERATION STATUS MONITOR SCREEN.............126

Operation Time Setting Screen .......................................58

Operational Situation Item Setting ................................122

OPERATIONAL SITUATION SCREEN.....................120

OPERATIONS OF THE MULTI-LANGUAGE

BATCH INPUT TOOL.................................................171

OPERATOR'S PANEL ® PLC (M0112 TO M0254) ...231

OPERATOR'S PANEL SIGNAL MAP........................223

Output of Internal Operator's Panel Data - Setting

Table (4/4).......................................................................69

OVERVIEW .....................................................................1

OVERVIEW .................................................................205

OVERVIEW OF FPASSIST...........................................49

<P> Page switch method.......................................................114

Path Selection Signal Setting - Setting Table (3/4) .........87

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCREEN ......................163

Periodic Maintenance Screen Setting - Setting Table

(1/1)...............................................................................165

PLC ® OPERATOR'S PANEL (N0080 TO N0254) ....225

Procedure for Creating Screens That Support

Multi-Language Display Switching ................................26

Procedure for Creating Standard Screens for Toyota

Motor...............................................................................25

PROCEDURE FOR SCREEN CREATION ...................25

Program check subscreen ................................................83

Project Screen List Sheet ..............................................172

<Q> Quality Check PMC Ladder and Timing Chart.............149

QUALITY CHECK SCREEN ......................................147

Quality Check Screen Setting - Setting Table (1/1) ......150

<R> Registering Screens .........................................................60

REGISTERING/CHANGING/DELETING

OPERATOR'S PANEL SCREENS.................................50

Relationship with the operational situation screen ........114

Rename............................................................................52

Reread of a User Form ..................................................187

Reread of an FPAssist Form..........................................185

Resetting of a current value counter................................93

RESTRICTIONS...............................................................7

RUNNING DISPLAY 2 SCREEN................................109

Running Display Lamp Setting - Setting Table (3/3)....108

RUNNING DISPLAY SCREEN...................................106

<S> SAFETY IO STATUS DISPLAY SCREEN.................153

Safety IO Status Display Screen Setting - Setting Table

(1/2)...............................................................................159

Safety IO Status Display Screen Setting – Setting Table

(2/2)...............................................................................161

Screen Configuration.......................................................77




Screen Configuration.....................................................106










SCREEN CREATION PROCEDURE USING

FPASSIST .......................................................................56

SCREEN CREATION USING THE SCREEN

CREATION SUPPORT TOOL (FPASSIST)..................55

Screen function..............................................................133

Screen Registration - Setting Table (1/4) ........................61

SCREEN REGISTRATION AND SETTING OF THE

ENTIRE SYSTEM..........................................................57

Screen Specification......................................................123

Screen Switch Menu........................................................59

SCREENS CREATABLE WITH THE TOOL .................5

INDEX B-66254EN/05

i-4

SETTING A MENU FUNCTION...................................27

Setting a Project ..............................................................30

Setting and display of limit values ................................100

Setting and display of pre-forecast, forecast, and stop

values ..............................................................................92

Setting of Counter Names and So Forth - Setting Table

(1/3)...............................................................................103

SETTING ON THE CNC SIDE........................................8

Shift Time Setting - Setting Table (3/4) ..........................68

Signal monitor subscreen ................................................78

SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................................3

<T> Ten-Key Pad Setting - Setting Table (2/3) ......................95

TOOL COMPENSATION COUNTER SCREEN ..........99

TOOL EXCHANGE COUNTER 1 SCREEN ................91

TOOL EXCHANGE COUNTER 2 SCREEN ................97

TR SAFETY I/O STATUS DISPLAY..........................158

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDANCE SCREEN ..........128

TWO-BYTE CHARACTERS.......................................193

<U> UNINSTALLING FANUC PICTURE & FPASSIST.....19

UPGRADING THE MULTI-LANGUAGE BATCH

INPUT TOOL ............................................................... 188

UPGRADING TO THE LATEST VERSION ................54

User Screen Multi-Language Setting Sheet ..................180

USING FANUC PICTURE.............................................20

<V> VERSION DISPLAY......................................................54

<W> WARNING ...................................................................181

When two paths are used...............................................102

<α> αi MOTOR TEMPERATURE MONITOR SCREEN ..166

αi Motor Temperature Monitor Screen Setting -

Setting Table (1/1) ........................................................168

R

evis

ion

Rec

ord

FA

NU

C P

ICTU

RE

& F

PA

ssis

t (Fo

r Win

dow

s) O

PE

RA

TOR

’S M

AN

UA

L(B

-662

54E

N)

05

Dec

., 20

04A

dditi

on o

r mod

ifica

tion

to e

xpla

natio

ns o

f the

si

mpl

ified

Chi

nese

dis

play

func

tion

1, 2

.3, 2

.5, 3

.1, 4

.2.2

, 4.3

.1, 4

.3.3

, 8.8

04

May

, 200

4

Add

ition

or m

odifi

catio

n of

follo

win

g ite

ms

: 2.

2, 2

.7, 2

.8, 3

.2, 4

.1, 4

.2, 4

.3, 6

.5, 7

.5, 7

.6, 7

.7, 7

.8,

7.12

, 7.1

5, 7

.17,

7.1

8, 7

.19,

7.2

0, 7

.21,

7.2

.5.1

, 7.2

2,

App

endi

x E

, App

endi

xC.3

03

Dec

., 20

03

Add

ition

of f

ollo

win

g se

ctio

ns :

2

.7, 2

.8, 6

.4, 7

.2.2

, 7.1

9, 7

.20,

7.2

1, 7

.22,

7.2

3, 7

.24

Add

ition

of e

xpla

natio

ns in

follo

win

g se

ctio

ns :

4.7

, 7.5

.2, 7

.18.

1.5,

7.1

8.1.

6

02

May

, 200

1

Add

ition

of e

xpla

natio

ns in

follo

win

g se

ctio

ns :

3

.2 IN

STA

LLIN

G F

AP

T P

ICTU

RE

& F

PA

SS

IST

4.1

AC

TIV

ATI

NG

FA

PT

PIC

TUR

E

4.3

CR

EA

TIN

G A

NE

W P

RO

JEC

T A

dditi

on o

f fol

low

ing

sect

ions

:

3.3

UN

INS

TALL

ING

FA

PT

PIC

TUR

E &

FP

AS

SIS

T 4

.10

AS

SIS

TAN

T V

-UP

01

Ja

n., 2

001

Edi

tion

Dat

e C

onte

nts

Edi

tion

Dat

e C

onte

nts

Documents

66254 En